You are on page 1of 454

Software and Key Operator Online Help

Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

8G0242

29 January 2009

Version 2.0
Table Of Contents
General Information ...................................................................................................................................... 1
New Features................................................................................................................................................ 1
Use of CR System and DR System Terminology.......................................................................................... 2
About Online Help ......................................................................................................................................... 3
Software Version ....................................................................................................................................... 3
How Do I Access and Navigate Help?....................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 3
KODAK DIRECTVIEW Software................................................................................................................... 4
Trademark and Copyright Information....................................................................................................... 4
FCC Compliance ....................................................................................................................................... 4
How to Contact Carestream Health, Inc. ...................................................................................................... 5
AEC Calibration............................................................................................................................................. 6
CR System Overviews .................................................................................................................................. 7
Main Menu Functions.................................................................................................................................... 7
Quick Reference Button Guide ..................................................................................................................... 9
Radiographer's Screen Guide..................................................................................................................... 12
CR System Software Overview................................................................................................................... 13
CR Modality Overview................................................................................................................................. 14
Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions.................................................................................. 15
Scheduled Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 17
Workflow Configurations ............................................................................................................................. 17
Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS) ............................................................................................. 18
Scheduled Workflow Configurations ........................................................................................................... 19
Scanning Equipment and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 21
Scanning CR Cassettes Menu .................................................................................................................... 21
Using the Touch-Screen.............................................................................................................................. 22
High-Resolution Scanning........................................................................................................................... 23
What Are Scan Modes?........................................................................................................................... 23
Slow System Response .............................................................................................................................. 24
CR System Freeze-up................................................................................................................................. 25
Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System ..................................................................................................... 26
Loading a Cassette.................................................................................................................................. 26
Scanning on a CR 825/850 System............................................................................................................ 27
Loading a Cassette.................................................................................................................................. 27
Scanning on a CR 950/975 System............................................................................................................ 28
Loading Cassettes ................................................................................................................................... 28

iii
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Purchasing Erase Lamps ............................................................................................................................ 30


Logging and Shutdown Procedures............................................................................................................ 31
Logging On and Logging Out of the Modality ............................................................................................. 31
Shutting Down the CR System ................................................................................................................... 32
Restarting Versus Rebooting ...................................................................................................................... 34
Using the Shutdown Button......................................................................................................................... 35
Scan Status Screen..................................................................................................................................... 37
Patient Information Bar ............................................................................................................................... 37
Using the Erase Cassette Tab..................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab............................................................................................................... 39
Using the Scan Status Screen .................................................................................................................... 40
CR 825/850/950/975 Systems................................................................................................................. 40
Classic/Elite CR Systems ........................................................................................................................ 40
Using the Scan Status Tab .......................................................................................................................... 42
Using the System Recovery Tab ................................................................................................................. 43
Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages...................................................................................... 45
Cassette Jams ............................................................................................................................................ 45
CR 825/850/950/975 Systems................................................................................................................. 45
Classic/Elite CR Systems ........................................................................................................................ 45
Scanner Error.............................................................................................................................................. 46
Scanning CR Cassettes Menu .................................................................................................................... 47
Resolving Cassette ID Errors...................................................................................................................... 48
Bar-Code Scanner ...................................................................................................................................... 49
Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner ....................................................................................... 49
Information Does Not Appear...................................................................................................................... 50
Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner?.................................................................................................. 51
CR System Exams................................................................................................................................... 53
Beginning a Patient Exam........................................................................................................................... 53
Completing an Exam Set-up ....................................................................................................................... 55
Setting Up Views for My Procedure ............................................................................................................ 57
Accepting the Image ................................................................................................................................... 59
Correcting Image Artifacts........................................................................................................................... 60
Modifying a Delivered Image....................................................................................................................... 61
Flagging an Image for Review .................................................................................................................... 62
Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure ................................................................................. 63
Rejecting an Image ..................................................................................................................................... 64
Reviewing Images....................................................................................................................................... 65
Adjusting Image Quality........................................................................................................................... 66

iv
Table Of Contents

Adjusting Image Parameters Menu............................................................................................................. 66


Adjusting Image Quality Controls................................................................................................................ 67
How to Use Window/Level .......................................................................................................................... 68
Increasing Latitude...................................................................................................................................... 69
Image Processing Failure ........................................................................................................................... 70
Reprocessing the Image ............................................................................................................................. 71
Using the Histogram.................................................................................................................................... 72
Using the Image Adjustment Tab ................................................................................................................ 73
Using the Image Viewer Screen.................................................................................................................. 74
Image Viewer Palette Tabs...................................................................................................................... 74
Adjusting for More Detail............................................................................................................................. 76
Assigning and Unassigning Images ........................................................................................................ 77
Assigning an Image..................................................................................................................................... 77
Assigning an Image to a Different Patient................................................................................................... 78
How an Image Becomes Unassigned......................................................................................................... 79
Unassigning an Image ................................................................................................................................ 80
Cropping Images ..................................................................................................................................... 81
Using the Crop Box Adjustment Tab ........................................................................................................... 81
Using Manual Cropping............................................................................................................................... 83
Delivering Images .................................................................................................................................... 85
Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery ....................................................................................................... 85
Viewing a Thumbnail Image........................................................................................................................ 86
Auto Display in QA Mode ............................................................................................................................ 87
Pass-through Mode..................................................................................................................................... 88
Auto Display in QA Mode ............................................................................................................................ 89
Acceptance by Image .............................................................................................................................. 89
Acceptance by Study ............................................................................................................................... 89
Storage Commitment Function ................................................................................................................... 90
Distributing Images .................................................................................................................................. 91
Sending Images to a Different Location...................................................................................................... 91
Distributing the Image ................................................................................................................................. 92
Entering and Deleting Data...................................................................................................................... 93

v
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Auto-Associating Information ...................................................................................................................... 93


Creating an Additional Study....................................................................................................................... 94
Displaying the Procedures List ................................................................................................................... 95
Displaying Other Studies for a Patient ........................................................................................................ 96
Displaying Image Icons ............................................................................................................................... 97
Modifying Information.................................................................................................................................. 98
How to End a Study..................................................................................................................................... 99
Entering Temporary Trauma Patient Data for Performing a Trauma Exam .............................................. 100
Entering Additional Exam Information....................................................................................................... 101
Exam Information................................................................................................................................... 101
More Information.................................................................................................................................... 101
More Image Data ................................................................................................................................... 102
Resolving Cassette ID Errors.................................................................................................................... 103
Using the Patient Input Screen ................................................................................................................. 104
More Image Data ...................................................................................................................................... 105
More Information ....................................................................................................................................... 107
Image Orientation and Appearance....................................................................................................... 108
Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab........................................................................................................ 108
Reducing Noise......................................................................................................................................... 109
Using Grid Suppression Software ............................................................................................................. 110
Magnification Tab .......................................................................................................................................111
Rotating and Flipping the Image ............................................................................................................... 112
Reversing the Image ................................................................................................................................. 113
Using the Comment Tab............................................................................................................................ 114
Review Needed Status.............................................................................................................................. 115
Markers .................................................................................................................................................. 116
Markers Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 116
Adding Markers ......................................................................................................................................... 117
Adding the Text Marker ............................................................................................................................. 119
Moving a Marker ....................................................................................................................................... 120
Removing a Marker................................................................................................................................... 121
Using the Favorites Markers ..................................................................................................................... 122
Using the Measures Markers .................................................................................................................... 123
Using the Others Marker Group................................................................................................................ 124
Using the Time Markers ............................................................................................................................ 126
Masking.................................................................................................................................................. 127

vi
Table Of Contents

Using the Surround Mask Tab................................................................................................................... 127


Masking Failure......................................................................................................................................... 129
Applying Automatic Surround Mask (optional) .......................................................................................... 130
Mask Points Are Off the Screen ................................................................................................................ 131
Applying Manual Surround Mask (optional) .............................................................................................. 132
Reprocessing After Using Edit Mask......................................................................................................... 133
Measurement Tools ............................................................................................................................... 134
Using Measurement Tools......................................................................................................................... 134
Measurement Tool Sample ....................................................................................................................... 136
Optimizing the Exam.............................................................................................................................. 136
Optimizing the Exam.............................................................................................................................. 137
Performing the Exam ................................................................................................................................ 137
Improving Acquisition Techniques ............................................................................................................. 139
How can I improve my image quality?................................................................................................... 139
Guidelines for Good Exposures............................................................................................................. 139
Determining the Exposure Index............................................................................................................... 140
Patient CD.............................................................................................................................................. 142
Patient CD (optional)................................................................................................................................. 142
Printing................................................................................................................................................... 144
Using the Print Tab .................................................................................................................................... 144
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen ............................................................................................ 146
Selecting a Destination ............................................................................................................................. 148
Selecting a Text Box.................................................................................................................................. 149
Positioning an Internal Text Box................................................................................................................ 150
Positioning an External Text Box............................................................................................................... 151
Creating a True-size Print ......................................................................................................................... 152
What Is Multi-format Printing?................................................................................................................... 153
Best Fit to Print.......................................................................................................................................... 154
Creating Multi-format Prints ...................................................................................................................... 155
Selecting Multi-formats.............................................................................................................................. 157
Adding a Multi-format Print........................................................................................................................ 158
Searching Techniques ........................................................................................................................... 159

vii
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Finding an Image ...................................................................................................................................... 159


Identifying Work List Colors ...................................................................................................................... 160
Improving Search Results ......................................................................................................................... 161
Searching for an Existing Patient.............................................................................................................. 164
Using the Patient Query Screen ............................................................................................................... 166
Using the Patient Work List Screen .......................................................................................................... 167
Using the Image List Screen ..................................................................................................................... 168
Views ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
Defining a View ......................................................................................................................................... 170
Adding a View ........................................................................................................................................... 171
Deleting a View ......................................................................................................................................... 172
Changing the View Name ......................................................................................................................... 173
Capture Link System................................................................................................................................. 175
Basic information ................................................................................................................................... 175
Joining Devices ......................................................................................................................................... 175
Capture Link System Workflow ................................................................................................................. 176
Capture Link System Range of Operation ................................................................................................ 177
Identifying Active Devices in the Capture Link System............................................................................. 182
Identifying Icons ........................................................................................................................................ 183
Using the Capture Link System ................................................................................................................ 185
Standalone Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 187
Basic Capture Link System Operations................................................................................................. 188
Changing Image Processing in the Capture Link System ........................................................................ 188
Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link System................................................................ 190
Communicating with the HIS/RIS.............................................................................................................. 192
Entering Data in the Capture Link System................................................................................................ 193
Image Review with the Capture Link System ........................................................................................... 194
Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System.................................................................................. 195
Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System ........................................................... 196
Capture Link System Communications ................................................................................................. 197
Image Recovery on the Capture Link System .......................................................................................... 197
Rejoining the Capture Link System........................................................................................................... 199
Redelivering an Image .............................................................................................................................. 200
Using Image Recovery to Capture Link .................................................................................................... 201
Capture Link Configuration .................................................................................................................... 202

viii
Table Of Contents

Making Preference Editor Changes in the Capture Link System.............................................................. 202


Capture Link Configuration Screen........................................................................................................... 204
Configuring and Connecting a Console or Accessory Device .................................................................. 205
Capture Link System Requirements ......................................................................................................... 206
Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone Machine........................................................ 207
Removing a Console from the Capture Link System................................................................................ 208
Troubleshooting the Capture Link System ................................................................................................ 209
Capture Link Server Help ...................................................................................................................... 210
Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory ............................................................................................. 210
EMC ....................................................................................................................................................... 210
Safety..................................................................................................................................................... 210
Logging On to the Capture Link Server .................................................................................................... 211
Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen .......................................................................................... 212
Using the Capture Link Server .................................................................................................................. 213
Key Operator Functions ............................................................................................................................ 215
Key Operator Functions Menu .................................................................................................................. 215
Backup and Restore Configurations ......................................................................................................... 216
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 219
Bar-Code Scanner Configuration .......................................................................................................... 220
Programming the Automatic Trigger ......................................................................................................... 220
Bar-Code Configuration Menu .................................................................................................................. 221
How to Configure a Bar-Code ................................................................................................................... 221
Bar-Code Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 222
Bar-Code Programming ............................................................................................................................ 224
How to Change the Beeper Mode............................................................................................................. 225
How to Change the Cassette ID format .................................................................................................... 226
Changing the Country Code...................................................................................................................... 227
Changing the Data Field Size ................................................................................................................... 229
Changing the Prefix and Suffix.................................................................................................................. 230
Configuring Reread Delay......................................................................................................................... 231
Stripping a Bar-Code Field ........................................................................................................................ 232
Stripping Middle Characters from the Bar-Code ....................................................................................... 233
Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen................................................................................................ 234
Bar-Code Programming Samples....................................................................................................... 236

ix
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples ............................................................................................................. 236


Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 2) .............................................................................................. 238
Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 3) .............................................................................................. 240
Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 4) .............................................................................................. 242
Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 5) .............................................................................................. 244
Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 6) .............................................................................................. 246
Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 7) .............................................................................................. 247
Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader ............................................................................ 248
Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix .................................................... 250
Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader................................................................................. 252
Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix......................................................... 254
Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader .................................................................... 256
Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add Suffix ............................................ 258
Programming the Serial Scanner Bar-Code Reader ................................................................................ 259
Programming the USB as Serial Bar-Code Reader.................................................................................. 260
HIS/RIS Communications Configuration ............................................................................................... 261
How to Configure for a Polling Query ....................................................................................................... 261
HIS/RIS Options........................................................................................................................................ 261
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 262
HIS/RIS Polling Query............................................................................................................................... 263
How to Change Field Descriptions............................................................................................................ 265
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 265
Long-Length Imaging Configuration.......................................................................................................... 266
Required Source to Image (SID) values................................................................................................ 266
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 266
Setting the Limits for Image Retention...................................................................................................... 267
Color Preferences Configuration............................................................................................................... 268
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 268
Delivery Preferences Configuration .......................................................................................................... 269
Display Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 271
Harvesting Flagged Images ...................................................................................................................... 274
Flagged Image List Controls.................................................................................................................. 274
Why Didn't My Images Transfer? .......................................................................................................... 275
Monitor Calibration................................................................................................................................. 276
Monitor Calibration Introduction ................................................................................................................ 276
Why Can't I Start the Test?.................................................................................................................... 276

x
Table Of Contents

Display Pro for General Radiography ....................................................................................................... 277


SMPTE Test Target ................................................................................................................................... 278
Monitor Calibration .................................................................................................................................... 279
Why Can't I Start the Test?.................................................................................................................... 279
Touch-screen Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 280
Why Can't I Get to the Calibration Screen?........................................................................................... 280
Measuring Luminance for Tracking........................................................................................................... 281
Measuring Luminance for Gamma............................................................................................................ 282
How to Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer ................................................................................. 283
Regional Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 284
System Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 285
Layout Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 285
Patient Input Screen Layout Samples ................................................................................................... 286
List Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 289
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 289
Procedure Mapping Configuration (optional) ............................................................................................ 291
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 291
Reject Reasons Configuration .................................................................................................................. 293
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 293
Required Fields Configuration................................................................................................................... 295
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 295
Image Viewer Editor Configuration........................................................................................................ 296
Changing Image Processing Preferences ................................................................................................ 296
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 297
What Is a Look? ........................................................................................................................................ 299
The Family of Looks .............................................................................................................................. 299
What Is a DICOM GSDF-calibrated Monitor? ........................................................................................... 300
Region of Interest (ROI) Tool .................................................................................................................... 301
Mean Code Value Usefulness ............................................................................................................... 302
Image Processing Controls ....................................................................................................................... 303
Using View Before and After ..................................................................................................................... 304
Changing the Look .................................................................................................................................... 305
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 305
Configuring Destination Profiles ............................................................................................................ 306
What Is a Destination Profile?................................................................................................................... 306
Destination Profile Configuration .............................................................................................................. 307
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 308
View Configuration................................................................................................................................. 309
View Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 309
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 311

xi
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Tab Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 312


Configuring Surround Mask Enlargement................................................................................................. 314
Surround Mask Enlargement Appearance ............................................................................................ 314
Changing View Configuration Attributes ................................................................................................... 316
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 316
Managing View Categories ....................................................................................................................... 317
What Is a SNOMED Code....................................................................................................................... 318
Trauma Default Configuration................................................................................................................ 319
Trauma Defaults Configuration ................................................................................................................. 319
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 319
Entering or Changing Trauma Exam Data ................................................................................................ 321
Hiding Trauma Exam Buttons ................................................................................................................... 322
Statistics................................................................................................................................................. 323
Viewing Radiographer's Statistics ............................................................................................................. 323
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 323
Viewing Destination Summary Statistics................................................................................................... 324
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 324
Viewing the Flagged Image List ................................................................................................................ 325
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 325
Downloading Statistics .............................................................................................................................. 326
Navigation Buttons................................................................................................................................. 326
Cassette Statistics..................................................................................................................................... 327
Erase Cycles ............................................................................................................................................. 328
Exporting Data........................................................................................................................................... 329
Text Box Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 331
Configurable Text Box Menu ..................................................................................................................... 331
Configuring Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................. 332
Multi-format Image Internal Text Box ........................................................................................................ 333
Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box ........................................................................................... 334
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box .................................................................................................... 335
Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box ........................................................................................... 336
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box.......................................................................................... 337
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box ........................................................................................... 338
Using a Single Image External Text Box................................................................................................... 339
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box ................................................................................................. 340
Editing a Text Box ..................................................................................................................................... 341
What are the Text Box Editing Controls? .............................................................................................. 342

xii
Table Of Contents

Configurable Text Box Options.................................................................................................................. 344


Managing Patient Exam Records ............................................................................................................. 345
Navigational Controls............................................................................................................................. 345
Register and Activate Options................................................................................................................... 346
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 347
Scanner Options ....................................................................................................................................... 348
CSA Log Viewer ........................................................................................................................................ 349
Remote Devices........................................................................................................................................ 351
Configuring Remote Devices .................................................................................................................... 351
Navigational Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 351
Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System ............................................................................... 353
Remote Workstation Options .................................................................................................................... 354
Easy to Use Remote Access Software ..................................................................................................... 356
ROP Links Configuration........................................................................................................................... 357
Administrative Analysis and Reporting Feature ........................................................................................ 358
Remote Patient Data Entry System .......................................................................................................... 359
Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES) .......................................................................................... 359
Local User Interface .................................................................................................................................. 361
Local User Interface Main Menu ............................................................................................................... 361
Using the Volume Settings Tab ................................................................................................................. 364
Long-Length Imaging ................................................................................................................................ 365
Long-Length Imaging Menu ...................................................................................................................... 365
Acquiring Images ................................................................................................................................... 365
Composite Images................................................................................................................................. 365
Acquiring Images ................................................................................................................................... 366
Performing a Long-Length Exam .............................................................................................................. 366
Optimizing a Long-Length Exam............................................................................................................... 367
Entering Data for an LLI Exam.................................................................................................................. 368
Determining the SID.................................................................................................................................. 369
LLI Techniques .......................................................................................................................................... 370
Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link System ........................................................... 371
Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images (LLI) ............................................................................ 372
KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid........................................................................................... 373
Tips for Optimizing Long-length Image Quality ......................................................................................... 374
Composite Images................................................................................................................................. 375

xiii
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Printing Long-Length Images .................................................................................................................... 375


Viewing Long-Length Images.................................................................................................................... 376
No Composite Image ................................................................................................................................ 377
Images are Stitched Incorrectly................................................................................................................. 378
Distorted Composite Image....................................................................................................................... 379
Total Quality Tool ....................................................................................................................................... 381
What Is TQT? ............................................................................................................................................ 381
Performing System Tests .......................................................................................................................... 382
Testing Cassettes...................................................................................................................................... 383
Selecting a Test Phantom ......................................................................................................................... 384
Positioning a Test Phantom....................................................................................................................... 385
Appending the Session ............................................................................................................................. 387
Exposure................................................................................................................................................ 388
Determining the Exposure......................................................................................................................... 388
Collimating for TQT Testing....................................................................................................................... 389
System Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 390
Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page .................................................................................................... 390
Tests ...................................................................................................................................................... 390
Performing Phantom Tests for General Radiography ............................................................................... 392
Performing the Erased Image Test............................................................................................................ 393
Understanding the System Noise Test ...................................................................................................... 394
Cassette Testing.................................................................................................................................... 395
Cassette Testing Menu.............................................................................................................................. 395
Testing Cassettes with TQT ...................................................................................................................... 396
Flat-Field Image Test................................................................................................................................. 397
Performing a Flat-Field Image Test........................................................................................................... 399
Best Results from Cassette Testing .......................................................................................................... 400
Viewing Test Result Indicators .................................................................................................................. 401
Reported Cassette Test Results................................................................................................................ 402
Results ................................................................................................................................................... 403
Using Results (Page 1) ............................................................................................................................. 403
Using Results (Page 2) ............................................................................................................................. 404
How to Export Data ................................................................................................................................... 405
Additional Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 406

xiv
Table Of Contents

Cassette Inventory and Inspection............................................................................................................ 406


Cleaning Cassettes ................................................................................................................................... 407
Film-Printer Calibration Test...................................................................................................................... 408
Workstation Display Calibration Test......................................................................................................... 409
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................... 410
Phantom Image Test Failure ..................................................................................................................... 410
Flat-field Test Failure................................................................................................................................. 415
System Noise Test Failure ........................................................................................................................ 417
Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography........................................................................................ 418
Utilities....................................................................................................................................................... 419
Utilities Menu............................................................................................................................................. 419
Changing Your Password.......................................................................................................................... 420
Installing Software Updates ...................................................................................................................... 421
Image Recovery on the Capture Link System .......................................................................................... 422
Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen .......................................................................................... 424
Viewing the Status of System Communications........................................................................................ 425
Glossary .................................................................................................................................................... 427
Index.......................................................................................................................................................... 433

xv
General Information
New Features
Select the links below for more information about the new features introduced with this software
version.
Auto-AssociateAn automatic association of a cassette with a View is introduced on the
Classic/Elite and 825/850 CR Systems.
Backup and RestoreWonder what's backed up and what's not? A complete map of backup
features by equipment type is included.
Bar-Code ConfigurationConfiguration for all bar-code readers. New bar-code samples are
provided for all bar-code readers.
Bar-Code RequisitionThe system retrieves an exam from the work list when reading a bar-
code record of the Accession Number, or Patient ID at the Main Menu or Image Review
Screen.
Capture Link SystemThe Range of Operation describes which system configurations are
transferred to CR and DR devices when a change in the Capture Link System occurs.
Carestream Health Display Pro TargetProvides a visual density scale to determine whether
the monitor needs to be calibrated.
Local User InterfaceA complete feature menu is available on the Classic/Elite CR System,
replacing the Scan Status Screen function.
Manual Cropping Manual Cropping lets you crop an image when printing it onto a film that is
smaller than the cassette in which the image was exposed. A crop box is displayed when the
Manual Crop feature is activated. The aspect ratio of the crop box is fixed depending upon the
printer selected. From the Main Menu, select Image Review.
Measurement Tools You can measure and display the Distance, Angle, and Cobb Angle
during the process of reviewing images on the CR or DR Console.
More Image DataYou can edit patient information at any time before image delivery.
Patient CDYou can make a CD of a patient's study or of all studies for a patient with a push of
a button.
Region of InterestThe Region of Interest (ROI) is a defined region on the image that reveals
the mean pixel value of a selected point. This software version adds optical density to the
calculation, so the displayed value now includes the value for the raw (unprocessed) image,
as well as the processed image.
QA by Image ModeThe Key Operator selects this option in the Delivery Preferences
Screen. When an image is associated with a view on the Patient Input Screen, it will
immediately open the Image Viewer Screen.

1
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Use of CR System and DR System Terminology


KODAK DIRECTVIEW Version 5 Software has a software base that is used commonly between
CR and DR Systems. CR and DR Systems are referred to as the Modality. Common references
will be made as Modality.
If information applies only to a specific CR or DR system, the system name will be clearly
indicated, or the model name will be clearly indicated, such as CR 850 System or DR 7500
System.

2
General Information

About Online Help


29 January 2009
Online Help Version C1.4
Software Version
The Online Help provides information on the function of CR Systems operating KODAK
DIRECTVIEW Version 5.2 software or higher.
How Do I Access and Navigate Help?
Select the question mark in the upper right corner of the CR or DR screen to open context-
sensitive help.
Select the Back or Forward arrows at the top of the Help window to move from screen to
screen.
Select the Close button at the top of the Help window to close the Online Help.
Select any blue link to jump to related topics for additional information: Main Menu
Select the Contents tab for access to all of the topics.
Select a term in the Index tab and select Display.
Select the Glossary tab for definitions of terms.
Document Conventions
The Online Help uses the following messages to emphasize information or potential risks to
personnel or equipment:
Notes provide additional information, such as expanded explanations, hints, or reminders.
Importants highlight critical policy information that affect how you use this information and this
product.
Cautions point out procedures that you must follow precisely to avoid injury to yourself,
others, damage to the system or any of its components, loss of data, or corruption of
files in software applications.
A tip is a technique or best practice recommendation that may improve your workflow.

Study Data indicates the topic is located in the Study Data


section of the software.
Image Review indicates the topic is located in the Image Review
section of the software.
Key Operator indicates the path through the Key Operator
software to the topic screen.

3
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

KODAK DIRECTVIEW Software


Trademark and Copyright Information
DIRECTVIEW and DRYVIEW are trademarks of Carestream Health, Inc.
The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak.
This document is copyrighted with all rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this document may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the
written consent of Carestream Health, Inc.
Under the law, copying includes translating into another language or format.
All names or identities used in this document are fictitious.
Federal law restricts this device to sale to, by, or on order of a physician.

The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the
subject matter gained by Carestream Health, Inc. prior to publication. No patent license is
granted by this information.
Carestream Health reserves the right to change this information without notice and makes no
warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information.
Carestream Health shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special
damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by
Carestream Health's negligence or other fault.
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
29 January 2009
Online Help Version C1.4
PN 8G0242

Carestream Health, Inc.


150 Verona Street
Rochester, N.Y. 14608

4
General Information

How to Contact Carestream Health, Inc.


In the U.S. and Canada:
Contact Carestream Health Technical Service Center when directed by your Service
Representative.
1-800-328-2910

General Customer Support for US and Canada


150 Verona Street
Rochester, NY 14608
1-800-431-7278

Cassette Repair Hotline


1-800-322-5711

If the cassette is in warranty, you will be assisted through the process.


If the cassette is out of warranty, you will receive a contact for cassette repair and cost.

Elsewhere in the world, contact Carestream Health, Inc. in your country.

5
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

AEC Calibration
The X-ray energy dependence of Computed Radiography detectors may be different than that
of intensifying screens used to expose film. Adjustment of the AEC configuration may be
necessary to account for the transmission of the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassette.
If AEC adjustment is required, it is appropriate to adjust AEC photo timers over the full range of
X-ray energies (kVp) that are used. The recommended exposure level is a general
recommendation based on balancing the requirements for high image quality and minimum
patient dose. All adjustments that affect patient dose should be done under the guidance of a
certified medical physicist to ensure that exposures are in compliance with all applicable
guidelines and local regulations.
A Medical Physicist or, if permitted by applicable regulations, qualified personnel under direction
of a Medical Physicist should:
Perform the necessary acceptance testing
Ensure the X-Ray Units Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) is properly calibrated for use with
KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes and meets applicable regulations.
Establish and/or approve the use of an exposure technique control chart.

If required, Carestream Health, Inc. can provide guidance for the AEC calibration procedure.
Contact your Carestream Health Inc. representative for more information.
All AEC adjustments and calibrations must be performed by qualified X-ray equipment
manufacturers or trained service providers.

See Also
Contact Carestream Health, Inc.

6
CR System Overviews
Main Menu Functions
The headings throughout the Help are color-coded for easy reference.
Function Name Description
Study Data Locate Patient and Exam Data
Enter New Patient Data
Create New Studies
Access Work Lists
Image Review Search for and View all Stored Images
Change Image Presentation
Add Markers, Change Orientation, Reverse Viewing; turn on/off
Grid Suppression and Noise Suppression
Change Image Quality Controls, Masking
Reprocess
Print Images as Single or Multi-Format
Scan Status Display the Last Scanned Image
Erase the Cassette
Display the Erase Lamp Status
Release Cassette and Phosphor Screen Jams
Key Operator Set up and Manage System Configurations
Functions
Service Functions Service the Machine (Qualified Service personnel only)
Utilities Change Password
System Status
Software Updates
Image Recovery
Image Recovery Capture Link
Capture Link Server Status
Security Generate User Names
Administrator
Manage User Accounts
Functions
Role Settings
User Configuration
Security Log Configuration
Archive Security Log Entries
New Patient Button Immediately opens the Patient Input Screen to create a new patient
record.
patient record.'

Quick Menu Button Provides quick access to logon, logout, and shutdown menus.
Images Not Displays the number of images on the system that are not

7
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Assigned Button assigned. Pressing the button takes you to the Image Review
Screen where the images are available.

The Key Operator Functions, Service Functions, and Security Administrator Functions are only
accessible by authorized personnel.

See also:
Quick Reference Button Guide
Radiographer's Screen Guide
Key Operator Functions
Utilities Menu

8
CR System Overviews

Quick Reference Button Guide


Select each button name for a description of its function.
In the Modality, a gray button indicates that the function is not active or available at that time.

Back Cancel Main Menu

Add View Delete View Save Changes

Accept Reject Image Re-Deliver Image


Image

Find Study Find Study Clear Fields


Locally Remotely

Reprocess Assign Unassign Image


Image

9
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Logon Logout Quick Menu

Shutdown Flag for Marker


Review

Images Images Not Select Destination


Failed to Assigned
Deliver

Destination Change Print


Status Destination
Profile

Add Multi- Delete Multi- Change Multi-


format Print format Print format
Configuration

Discontinue/Cancel
Multi-format Trauma

10
CR System Overviews

Next Page Previous New Patient


Page

New Study Begin Study End Study

Accept All Continue Without


Saving

11
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Radiographer's Screen Guide


Select a link below for information about the Radiographer's screens and tabs.
Main Menu
Patient Query
Patient Work List Screen
Patient Input Screen
More Image Data Tab
More Information Tab
Image Review Screen
Multi-format Configuration Screen
Image Viewer Screen
Image Adjustment Tab
Markers Tab
Surround Mask Tab
View Modification Tab
Crop Box Adjustment Tab
Print Tab
Magnification Tab
Comment Tab

12
CR System Overviews

CR System Software Overview


KODAK DIRECTVIEW EVP Plus Software (option) is a multi-frequency rendering algorithm. It
provides an image processing method that lets the system parameters provide independent
control of fundamental image quality attributes such as:
brightness
latitude
detail contrast
sharpness
noise suppression
KODAK DIRECTVIEW Image Processing Software is available for systems that do not
purchase the EVP option. This default software option provides you with less control of the
image processing features and allows only one View to choose from in the Image Processing
Preference Editor. Contact your sales representative for more information.

See also:
Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast
Reducing Noise in an Image

13
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

CR Modality Overview
The DIRECTVIEW CR (Computed Radiography) product family consists of a series of medical
scanners utilizing phosphor screen technology to produce diagnostic quality images. The
different product members offer a variety of performances and functional capabilities to meet the
demands of a range of large centralized sites to small clinics.
Each scanner allows the radiographer to input the required data manually or interface with the
site's HIS/RIS to retrieve patient information. Using the device's User Interface, the radiographer
can verify proper image placement and check for motion prior to routing images to printers or
store devices. The products can communicate with other medical devices, specifically store
devices and printers, that support the DICOM 3 standard.
The products support a number of add-on options that allow extended functionality, such as
advanced image processing, ability to perform long-length imaging, image reject analysis, and
various workflow enhancements. The products also support the use of the optional Total Quality
Tool (TQT) as a means to verify the integrity of the image acquisition and erase sub-systems
and the individual cassettes.
In addition, the CR System provides a Remote Operations Panel (ROP) that can be used to
interact with the product. This remote workstation allows control of certain CR System functions
from a remote location.

See also:
What is TQT?
Remote Workstation Options
Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System
Scanning on a CR 825/850 System
Scanning on a CR 950/975 System

14
CR System Overviews

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions


The radiographer may adjust three powerful parameters to fine-tune image quality.
Brightness makes an image lighter or darker.
Latitude controls the number of shades of gray visible in the image. Increasing the latitude
increases the number of gray levels, making blacks and whites less apparent. You may want to
increase the latitude if important anatomical information is in the black or white region of the
image and it cannot be visualized.
Detail Contrast controls the local contrast of medium-sized structures such as joint spaces,
vertebral body spacings, and ribs in the image. Increasing detail contrast makes anatomical
features more pronounced.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Using the Image Adjustment Tab
Adjusting Image Parameters
Viewing More Detail
Adjusting Image Quality Controls
Low Contrast Images
Increasing Latitude
Using the Histogram
Reprocessing an Image
How to Use Window and Level

15
Scheduled Workflow
Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Display
Configuration
Workflow Configurations
A Key Operator configures the System workflow to organize the way images are foldered at the
workstation. To set-up this configuration, go to Key Operator Functions > System
Configuration > Display Configuration. Select the Patient Input Tab. You can select the
radio button to configure your system with one of two ways to identify images:
Image Identifier Result
Select Create new procedure steps Create new procedure steps from the
from Patient Input to keep the same Patient Input Screen.
Study Instance Unique Identifier
(SIUID)This places the images into the
same study.
Select Create new Studies from Create new studies from the Patient
Patient Input to generate a new Study Input Screen.
Instance Unique Identifier (SIUID) and a
new Procedure Step.

Scheduled Workflow is an option that may be used with either of the workflow configurations
listed above.
Your system may be configured for either mode for Integrated Healthcare Enterprise (IHE)
compliance.

See also:
MPPS Mode

17
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS)


MPPS is an element of the optional Scheduled Workflow software feature. The MPPS feature
communicates with the Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager every time a procedure
starts, ends, or is discontinued using the appropriate button on the Patient Input Screen. The
Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager is responsible for updating the PACS system with
the information sent by the CR System.
The Key Operator selects the "Send scheduled workflow MPPS command" option on the
HIS/RIS Polling & Remote Query Screen.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen
HIS/RIS Configuration
HIS/RIS Polling Query

18
Scheduled Workflow

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Scheduled


Workflow Configuration
Scheduled Workflow Configurations
Scheduled Workflow provides automatic notification of exam status to the HIS, reducing the
steps necessary to complete the exam. It provides consistency for ordering patient images, and
defines schedules and imaging acquisition procedures.
Select the following check boxes to configure your system with one or more of the following
conditions:
Setting the Procedure Steps to Complete
Select the check box to configure Scheduled Workflow so that a study is automatically set to
Complete when all images are accepted.

Display End Procedure Step Confirmation Dialog Box


Select the check box to configure an End Study prompt when all images are accepted.

19
Scanning Equipment and Procedures
Scanning CR Cassettes Menu
Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System
Scanning on the CR 825/850 System
Scanning on the CR 950/975 System
High-Resolution Scanning
Scanner Error
Slow System Response
CR System Freeze-up

21
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Touch-Screen


When you are logged on, the Main Menu appears on the touch-screen.
To select a menu choice, select the center of the button. Selecting the edge of the button may
give you unexpected results.
Use only your finger or mouse to select buttons on the screen. Other objects can damage the
surface of the touch-screen.
The touch-screen automatically shuts off or goes to "sleep" if it is not used for a certain length of
time. Select the screen to reactivate it.
The basic Classic CR system is shipped with a flat panel, non-touch screen monitor. A touch
screen monitor is available as an upgrade on a Classic CR system.

22
Scanning Equipment and Procedures

High-Resolution Scanning
High-Resolution scanning produces diagnostic quality images with 97 micron spacing between
pixels. The bar-code on the cassette tells the CR System that a GP Plus Cassette is inserted,
and the scan rate changes to 97 microns.
GP Plus Scan Mode, available worldwide, produces high-resolution images with KODAK GP
Plus cassettes.
If the scanner does not recognize the bar-code, manually specify the cassette type.
What Are Scan Modes?
Scan Modes are unique to the Classic/Elite CR Systems. Scan Modes affect large cassettes
such as 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm.
You can set three scan modes from the Local User Interface (not from the Console):
Standard Speed Mode: High Resolution
High Speed Mode: Standard Resolution
This mode scans in the least amount of time.
Reduced Border: Images on 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm cassettes are captured with pixel
sizes of 171 microns rather than 168 microns. The scanned image area increases slightly,
producing borders smaller than those produced on other systems.

See also:
Scanning CR Cassettes
What do I do if I receive an error while scanning?
Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System
Scanning on a CR 825/850 System
Scanning on a CR 950/975 System
Automatic delivery vs manual delivery

23
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Scan Status

Slow System Response


Slow System Response means a long wait between screen changes or a long wait before data
appears on the screen. Resolving this may require a system reboot. The CR System may
require a weekly reboot, and in cases of high cassette throughput, you may need to reboot more
often.

See also:
Restarting Versus Rebooting
Shutting Down the CR System

24
Scanning Equipment and Procedures

CR System Freeze-up
If it is not possible to reboot the CR System using normal Shutdown procedures, it may be
necessary to manually reboot the System.
1. Select and quickly release the computer's Power button.
2. Wait 30 seconds.
3. Turn the computer back on.
If the power down sequence still does not initiate:
1. Select and hold the computer's Power button.
2. Wait 10 seconds.
3. Reinitiate the UPS system.
Use the computer's Power button to turn the computer back on if there is no UPS system.
If the Remote Operations Panel (ROP) won't respond:
1. Select the Quick Menu/Shutdown button to reboot the ROP.
2. If the Shutdown button is not available:
3. Turn Off the Power button located under the ROP's front panel.
4. Wait 10 seconds and turn the ROP back on.

See also:
How to Logon, Log Out
Shutting Down the CR System
Restarting Versus Rebooting
Using the Shutdown button

25
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System

Loading a Cassette
The cassette feed slot lets you insert a single cassette manually.
1. Hold the cassette with the yellow corner facing up and toward you.
2. Place the cassette in the feed slot with the tube side facing to the right.
3. Push the cassette into the slot. The CR System beeps once when it reads the cassette bar-code
label.
4. Push the cassette all the way to the back until the CR System beeps twice, signaling that you
can let go of the cassette.
After the cassette has been scanned, the CR system releases it, and displays the Remove
Cassette message on the Local User Interface.
5. Manually remove the cassette.
Make sure that the Tube Side label faces to the right, and the cassette's yellow corner is always
up and towards you.

See also:
Auto-Associating Information
Local User Interface Main Menu

26
Scanning Equipment and Procedures

Scanning on a CR 825/850 System

Loading a Cassette
1. Slide the cassette into the front of the cassette feed slot at the top of the CR 825/850 System.
When you insert the cassette into the CR 825/850 System, the cassette is pulled into scan
position and scanning starts immediately.
After the cassette has been scanned, the system releases it automatically.
2. Remove the cassette from the cassette feed slot.
Make sure that the tube side label faces to the right, and the cassettes yellow corner is always
up and towards you.
When the CR System scans the phosphor screen, it erases any residual image before it places
the phosphor screen back into the cassette for re-use.

See also:
CR System Freeze-up
What Is High Resolution Scanning?
Scanning CR Cassettes
Slow System Response
Scanner Error
Auto-Associating Information

27
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Scanning on a CR 950/975 System

Loading Cassettes
1 Place exposed cassettes on the right side of the feed slot.
1. Push a cassette all the way into one of the drive belt slots.
2. Set the cassette into the transport mechanism.
3. Make sure the cassette is perpendicular when loaded and pushed all the way to the back of the
slot.
You can load up to eight cassettes of all sizes at one time.

2 Start scanning when the Start button turns green.


1. Press the green Start button to begin scanning.
The Start button turns orange while scanning.
When the cassette reaches the feed slot, the phosphor screen is extracted and scanning starts
immediately.
When scanning is complete, the screen is erased and re-inserted into the cassette.
The cassette moves to the left as the next cassette reaches the feed slot.
2. You can now remove the cassette and reuse it.

3 Select the Start button to pause the transport.


When the system is paused, the Start button turns white.
Remove any completed cassettes from the left so that scanning can continue.

Make sure that the tube side label faces to the right, and the cassettes yellow corner is always
up and towards you.

28
Scanning Equipment and Procedures

When the CR System scans the phosphor screen, it erases any residual image before it places
the phosphor screen back into the cassette for re-use.
Place exposed STAT cassettes in the second slot to the right of the center process slot. If there
is already a cassette in the second slot, remove it first. Do not load or remove cassettes from
Slot 1.
The CR 950/975 has moving parts. Avoid contact with the belt.

See also:
CR System Freeze-up
High-Resolution Scanning
Scanner Error
Slow System Response

29
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Purchasing Erase Lamps


Order new erase lamps from Carestream Health, Inc. Customer Support. The erase lamps are
sold in pairs.
Customer Support (US and Canada)
1-866-927-1018

PN 7E9471
The part name to ask for is CR Erase Lamp Bulb.

Elsewhere in the world, contact Carestream Health Inc. in your country.

CARESTREAM HEALTH, INC.


150 Verona Street
Rochester, N.Y. 14608

30
Logging and Shutdown Procedures
Logging On and Logging Out of the Modality
To logon to the Modality:
1. Select the User Name field and type in your user name.
2. Select the Password field and type in your password.
3. Select Logon.
The Security Administrator determines what your log on information is.
If your system is configured without user names and passwords, select the Logon Tech button.
If you forgot your password:
Contact your Security Administrator for logon information.
Your Security Administrator can reset your password.
Your Security Administrator can configure your system so that user names and passwords are
not required.
To log out of the Modality:
1. Select the Quick Menu button (left most button on the bottom of the screen) to bring up the
menu.
2. Select the Logout button.

See also:
Shutting Down the CR System
Restarting Versus Rebooting
Using the Shutdown Button

31
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Shutting Down the CR System


Select the blue link below to for instructions on how to shut down the CR 825/850/950/975
System.
CR 825/850/950/975 System
To turn off the CR System:

1. Select the Quick Menu button , the lower left button on any CR System screen.
2. Select the Shutdown button.
3. On the Shutdown screen, select the appropriate radio button:
Restart: restarts the interface without turning off the machine.
Reboot: turns off and resets the machine.
Shutdown/Power Off: turns off all power to the machine and the interface.
4. Select OK.
The UPS shuts down up to one minute after the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Software and
MICROSOFT WINDOWS Operating System shut down.

Select the blue link below to for instructions on how to shut down the Classic/Elite CR System.
Classic/Elite CR System
To turn off the CR System:
1. At the Main Menu, select the Quick Start Menu button.

32
Logging and Shutdown Procedures

2. Select System Shutdown/Power Off and select OK. The CR computer shuts down.
3. Turn off the power switch on the side of the Classic/Elite CR System.

33
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Restarting Versus Rebooting


To Restart means to turn the software off and on without affecting the System computer.
To Reboot the system means to turn off and reinitialize the System.

34
Logging and Shutdown Procedures

Using the Shutdown Button


The Shutdown button is located in the lower left corner of every screen as part of the Quick
Menu. The Shutdown button displays different options depending on the logon password used.
For example, Service personnel see different options than radiographers.
1. At the Main Menu, select the Quick Menu button.
2. Select the Shutdown button.
The System Shutdown Menu of radio buttons appears:
Join Capture Link Server after Restart
Restart
Reboot
Shutdown/Power Off
o For the CR 825/850/950/975 System, selecting Shutdown/Power Off turns off all power
to the machine and the interface.
o For the Classic/Elite CR System, selecting Shutdown/Power Off shuts down the CR
System computer.
3. Select the appropriate action on the System Shutdown Menu.
4. Select OK.
5. For the Classic/Elite CR System, turn off the power switch on the side of the machine.

See also:
Restarting Versus Rebooting
Shutting Down the CR System
How to Log On and Log Out

35
Scan Status Screen
Patient Information Bar
The Patient Information Bar appears at the bottom of every image in the Image Viewer Screen.
It provides the current patient information for the displayed image.
When selected, it opens the patient record on the Patient Input Screen.

The information on the Patient Information Bar includes:


Patient Name
Patient ID
Accession number
Cassette ID
Exposure Index
Date/Time
Tech ID
View Name
You can select the previous image or the next image in the study by selecting the arrows on the
Patient Information Bar. The Patient Information Bar changes colors depending on the status of
the image. For example, the bar may be green for an image that is assigned, and orange for an
image that is unassigned.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Using the Scan Status Screen

37
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Erase Cassette Tab


1. Select the Erase Cassette Tab on the CR 825/850/950/975 system to place the system
automatically into the Erase Mode. Make sure that you want to erase a cassette! The system
cannot scan a cassette with an image while in Erase Mode.
For the Classic/Elite CR Systems, use the Erase button on the Local User Interface.
Erasing deletes any image on the phosphor screen.

2. Insert the cassette into the CR System.


Select the Erase Cassette button for the CR 950/975'
The phosphor screen is removed from the cassette, and erased from the screen. The
screen is replaced in the cassette for use with another exam.
The mechanical Start button on the front of the CR 950/975 is not active during Erase Mode.
Use the Erase Cassette function to erase a phosphor screen if the cassette has not been used
within 24 hours or if you suspect it has been exposed to any X-ray radiation.
Do not insert cassettes containing patient images into the CR 950/975 System while it is
erasing cassettes.

See also:
Using the Scan Status Screen

38
Scan Status Screen

Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab


The Erase Lamp Status Tab on the CR 825/850/950/975 system notifies you when one or
more pairs of erase lamps are not functioning.
For Classic/Elite CR Systems, the Erase Lamp Status appears only on the Local User
Interface.
When two pairs of lamps stop functioning, a warning appears and scanning is stopped. You
must replace the lamps. See the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems Hardware Guide for
instructions on replacing the lamps.

See also:
Purchasing Erase Lamps

39
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Scan Status Screen


Displays the last scanned image
Erases cassettes
Resolves cassette transport problems such as cassette jams
Provides erase lamp status
CR 825/850/950/975 Systems
The Scan Status Screen appears with the following Tabs/functions on the CR 825, CR 850,
CR 950, and CR 975 Systems.
Scan Status Tab Displays the last scanned image. From this tab
you can assign the image, access the Patient
Input Screen and the Image Viewer Screen. The
Pause Pass-through button is active if Pass-
through mode is configured, allowing inspection
of images before delivery.
Erase Cassette Erases cassettes that have become exposed to
Tab ambient radiation. Cassettes that have not been
used in 24 hours should be erased prior to use.
System Resolves cassette transport problems such as
Recovery Tab cassette jams.

Erase Lamp Tab Displays the Erase Lamp Status. System


warnings occur when one or more pairs of erase
lamps are not functioning.

Classic/Elite CR Systems
Only the Scan Status Tab is available on the Console of the Classic/Elite CR Systems. The
Erase Cassette Tab, System Recovery Tab, and Erase Lamp Tab functions are available on
the Local User Interface of the Classic/Elite CR Systems.

40
Scan Status Screen

See also:
Local User Interface Main Menu
Using the Scan Status Tab
Using the Erase Cassette Tab
Using the Scan Status Tab
Using the System Recovery Tab
Using the Erase Lamp Status Tab

41
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Scan Status Tab


Displays the status of image acquisition.
Progress bar Displays the progress of the scan from start to completion.
Pause Pass- If the Key Operator configures the system for Pass-through
through/Resume Mode, these buttons appear. They allow you to inspect an
Pass-through image before accepting and sending to destinations, and
functions then resume Pass-through Mode.
Image Viewer Screen Opens the Image Viewer Screen to modify the image
quality.
Assign Image Opens the Patient Query screen to assign patient
information to the image.
Patient Information Opens the Patient Input Screen to view or change patient
Bar information.
Patient Record Opens the Patient Input Screen to observe or change
patient information.

The Scan Status Tab displays on all CR Systems.

See also:
Using the Scan Status Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Assigning an Image
Patient Information Bar
Pass-through Mode
Using the Patient Input Screen

42
Scan Status Screen

Using the System Recovery Tab


To release cassettes that are not transporting properly:
1. Select Clear Cassette Jam to reverse the movement of the transport mechanism.
2. Select Release Cassette to move the cassette to the home position.
3. If the cassette is released, remove the cassette.
If the problem persists, call your Service Representative.

See also:
Using the Scan Status Screen

43
Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages
Local User Interface

Scan Status

Cassette Jams
CR 825/850/950/975 Systems
If a cassette jam occurs when you are using the CR 825/850/950/975 Systems, open and close
the front door of the CR System. This resets the CR System hardware and clears most cassette
jams.
If the cassette fails to release, do the following:
1. At the Main Menu, select Scan Status.
2. Select System Recovery.
3. Select Clear Cassette Jam to reverse the movement of the transport mechanism.
4. Select Release Cassette to move the cassette to the "home" position.
5. If the cassette is released, remove the cassette.
6. If the problem persists, call your Service Representative.
Classic/Elite CR Systems
1. Select the Local User Interface Utilities menu.
2. Select System Recovery.
3. Select Cassette Jams.

See also:
Local User Interface Main Menu
Using the System Recovery Tab

45
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Scan Status

Scanner Error
If you receive an error on the CR screen while scanning a cassette, make sure that the cassette
is inserted properly and follow the instructions on the screen.

See also:
Cassette Jams
Scanning CR Cassettes
Resolving a Cassette ID Error

46
Cassettes, Troubleshooting, and Error Messages

Scanning CR Cassettes Menu


Scanning on the Classic/Elite CR System
Scanning on the CR 825/850 System
Scanning on the CR 950/975 System
High-Resolution Scanning
Scanner Error
Slow System Response
CR System Freeze-up

47
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Resolving Cassette ID Errors


If you see the error Cassette ID Bar-code Read Failed, it means that the internal bar-code
scanner cannot read the cassette bar-code label. The cause is most often a degraded bar-code
label, not an issue with the equipment.
Select cancel from the dialog box to eject the cassette and try to reinsert the cassette.
or
Select the cassette type/size from the dialog box.
Contact Service to repair the bar-code label.
If a duplicate Cassette ID is entered:
You will receive a warning message and must choose one of the following:
Select Cancel New Image Information to use a different cassette for the exam.
Select Cancel Old Image Information to remove the cassette ID from the unacquired image in
the previous study.
If the Cassette ID field turns red:
The field turns red if the cassette ID is invalid. A valid cassette ID is a 10 digit number that
begins with the number 9.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

48
Bar-Code Scanner
Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner
You can populate ANY field in the Modality using the bar-code scanner. Select a data field and
scan a bar-code to place its value in the field. The system is capable of recognizing and
automatically placing the values. This feature is the system's ability to automatically recognize
certain data fields and enter the information without selecting that field in advance.
The Modality and the Bar-Code Scanner can:
Expedite data entry by reading bar-codes for selected fields and place those values into the
fields.
Automatically place the correct value in the correct field if you read an accession number or
Patient ID and the patient exam is opened automatically.
This includes:
Accession #
Patient ID
Procedure Code
Cassette ID
Tech ID
Automatically executes a local query to retrieve Work List or patient records that match the value
read.

See also:
Information Does Not Appear
Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner?

49
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Information Does Not Appear


Why doesn't the information appear when I use the bar-code scanner?
If the bar-code scanner beeps, it has read the bar-code successfully.
If the information does not appear or does not appear properly on the screen, the bar-code
scanner must be re-configured. The Key Operator can configure the bar-code scanner.
Bar-Code Configuration Menu
If there is no beep, check to see if there is a:
Hardware problem
Unreadable bar-code (it if it is due to a blurred bar-code, move the bar-code scanner closer or
farther away from the bar-code label as you scan)
Invalid bar-code
To determine if the bar-code scanner is functioning:
1. Press the trigger (if in manual trigger mode) while aiming the scanner at a sheet of paper.
2. Look for the red scanning beam. If you can see the red scanning beam, the device is working.

50
Bar-Code Scanner

Where Can I Use the Bar-Code Scanner?


You can use the bar-code scanner on any of the following screens to go to the Patient Input
Screen.
Main Menu Screen
Patient Query Screen
Patient Input Screen
Image List Screen

See also:
Entering Information with the Bar-Code Scanner

51
CR System Exams

Beginning a Patient Exam


To begin an exam from manual input:
1. Select the New Patient button from the Main Menu Screen.
2. Use the bar-code scanner to enter the patient information, or select the field and enter the
patient information by using the keyboard.
Highlighted fields are required fields and must be completed.
3. Select Save Changes.
To begin an exam for a patient already in the system:
1. Select Study Data from the Main Menu.
2. Enter search criteria such as the accession number or the first few letters of the patient's last
name.
3. Select Find Study Locally.
The Patient Input Screen opens if there is an exact match.
3. Select the patient name from the Work List if multiple entries are found.
4. The patient information fills in automatically on the Patient Input Screen.
5. Enter additional information if necessary.
6. Save Changes after entering the patient information.
To begin an exam from the HIS/RIS:
1. Select Study Data from the Main Menu.
2. Enter search criteria such as the accession number or the first few letters of the patient's last
name.
3. Select Find Study Locally.
4. Select Find Study Remotely if using Find Study Locally does not retrieve the patient record.
Find Study Remotely sends a request to the HIS/RIS for the patient record.
5. The Patient Input Screen opens if there is an exact match.
6. Select the patient name from the Work List if multiple entries are found.
7. The patient information fills in automatically on the Patient Input Screen.
8. Enter additional information if necessary.
9. Save Changes after entering the patient information.
To enter data from the Remote Patient Data Entry System:
The connection lets you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List.
When the Remote Patient Data Entry option has been enabled, the Remote Access Software
lets you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List.

See also:

53
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Patient Query Screen


Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the More Image Data Tab
Using the More Information Tab

54
Radiographer's Software

Completing an Exam Set-up


Setting up Views for My Study:
To complete the setup of an exam without the optional Procedure Mapping:
1. Select the Add View button.
2. Select a region from the Primary Category Tab.
3. Select a body part from the Secondary Category Tab.
4. Select all of the desired Views for the study.
5. Select Save Changes.
6. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed.
To complete an exam from the HIS/RIS with optional Procedure Mapping:
If your facility has a HIS/RIS and your modality has the optional Procedure Mapping feature,
the Key Operator can associate procedure codes to automatically populate the necessary views
for a study.
The HIS/RIS must populate the procedure code field on the Patient Input Screen in order for
the Views to automatically populate.
1. From the Main Menu, select Study Data.
2. Search for the patient using the Patient Query Screen.
3. Select the patient from the Patient Work List.
The patient information and the Views for the procedure automatically appear on the Patient
Input Screen.
Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed.
To complete an exam from optional Procedure Mapping without the HIS/RIS:
If your facility has purchased the optional Procedure Mapping feature, you can complete the
View selection process as follows:
1. From the Main Menu, select New Patient.
2. Manually enter the patient data and complete all of the highlighted required fields.
3. Select Procedure Name.
Steps 3-6 are not required if you know the procedure code. Enter the procedure Code in the
Procedure Code field and select Enter. The system automatically enters the procedure
name in the Procedure Name field and the associated Views automatically appear.
4. Select a region from the Primary Category Tab.
5. Select a body part from the Secondary Category Tab.
6. Select a Procedure.
The views for the procedure appear on the Patient Input Screen automatically.
7. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data Tabs if needed.

See also:

55
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the More Image Data Tab


Using the More Information Tab

56
Radiographer's Software

Setting Up Views for My Procedure


The following workflows let you enter procedure information quickly on the Patient Input
Screen:
Using the Add View Workflow
1. Manually enter required information in highlighted fields with the virtual keyboard, or use the
bar-code scanner. Required fields must be completed before you proceed with the exam.
2. Enter optional information, if available. Optional fields are not highlighted and do not have to be
filled in order to complete the exam. The Key Operator determines which fields are considered
optional.
3. Select the Procedure Name field if this field is not populated from the RIS. After selecting the
field, use the keyboard tab to manually name the procedure. The procedure then appears on the
Work List.
4. Select Add View.
5. Select a region from the Primary Category; select a body part from the Secondary Category.
6. Select all of the views in the study.
7. Enter information on the More Information and More Image Data tabs if needed.
8. Select Save Changes.
Using the Procedure Name Workflow
If your facility has the optional Procedure Mapping feature, you can automate the View selection
process as follows:
1. Select the Procedure Name field from the Patient Input Screen.
2. Select a region from the Primary Category.
3. Select a body part from the Secondary Category.
4. Select a Procedure.
The views for the procedure appear on the Patient Input Screen automatically.

Using the Automated Procedure Code Mapping Workflow


If your facility has a HIS/RIS with the optional Procedure Mapping feature, the Key Operator can
associate hospital codes that represent procedures with the data entry on the CR or DR
System.
When the patient information is selected from the Patient List, the codes are included in the list.
The Views for that procedure appear automatically on the Patient Input Screen.
1. From the Main Menu, select Study Data.
2. Search for the patient using the Patient Query Screen. You can type in the first letter of the
name to view the list.
3. Select the patient from the Patient List.
The patient information and the Views for the procedure automatically appear on the Patient
Input Screen.

57
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

See also:
Defining a View
Deleting a View
Changing the View Name

58
Radiographer's Software

Accepting the Image


Select the Accept Image button or the Accept All button when the image is suitable to be sent
to a destination.
Make sure that:
The patient was still and there is no motion visible in the image.
You can see the Region of Interest clearly.
The image is properly oriented for viewing and printing.
Markers and annotations are properly located.
Accepting the image sends the image to the printer or PACS workstation configured by the Key
Operator.

See also:
Adjusting Image Parameters
Correcting Image Artifacts
Adjusting Image Quality Controls
Flagging an Image

59
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Correcting Image Artifacts


How do I prevent black or white lines from recurring in my image?
Make sure that the phosphor screens and cassettes are clean. Always follow the manufacturer's
instructions when cleaning screens and cassettes.
Make sure that the CR room and CR System are kept clean and free of dust.
If the lines do not disappear after cleaning, call Service.
What do I do if the cassette stickers appear in the image?
Verify that stickers are on the reverse side of the cassette and that the cassette is exposed
tube-side up.
What do I do if the phosphor screen is damaged?
Replace the phosphor screen.

60
Radiographer's Software

Modifying a Delivered Image


Modifying a delivered image means that you want to change the image processing, add a
marker, or otherwise change the image that has been accepted and delivered to destinations
such as a printer or a PACS workstation. In order to modify a delivered image, you must first
create a copy of the image and then modify the copy. A delivered image cannot be altered any
other way.
1. Search for a delivered image on the Patient Input Screen or Image List Screen.
2. Select the image.
The Image Viewer Screen appears.
3. Select the Create Copy of Image button.
4. Modify the copy using the tools on the Image Viewer Screen.
5. Select Save & Accept Image.

See also:
Image List Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Adjusting Image Parameters
Reprocessing an Image

61
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Flagging an Image for Review


If an image requires additional review, you can mark it and save it to a database for review later.
From the Image Viewer Screen, do the following:
1. Select the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of the screen.
2. Select Flag for Review.
3. Select Save Changes.
The image is saved for review by the Key Operator or by Service. The Key Operator views
flagged images on the Flagged Image Screen.

See also:
Harvesting Flagged Images
Using the Image Viewer Screen

62
Radiographer's Software

Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure


If you see the message IPL Parameters failed, the system displays an unprocessed image. It
may look too dark or too light, and is unusually low in contrast. You can adjust the image using
the Window/Level tools.
Before making adjustments, make sure that the correct View has been selected. An incorrect
View could cause an Image Processing failure. If the View is correct, proceed with the
adjustments.
1. Select Window/Level Mode on the Image Viewer Screen Image Adjustment Tab.
Raise the Window slider control to decrease contrast.
Lower the Window slider control to increase the contrast.
Raise the Level slider control to increase the brightness.
Lower the Level slider control to decrease brightness.
2. Select Save Changes and Save & Accept Image when adjustments are complete.
This correction does not require reprocessing.

See also:
How to Use Window and Level
Image Processing Failure
Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions

63
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Rejecting an Image
If you do not want to accept an image:
1. Select the Reject Image button.
If the system has the optional Administrative Analysis and Reporting feature installed,
you must select a reason for rejection such as Motion or Clipped Anatomy.
2. Select the reason for rejecting the image.
3. Select Save Changes.
If you select "Other" as a Reject reason, you must enter a Reject comment.
The Key Operator determines how the system retains rejected images for further review.

See also:
Accepting the Image
Adjusting Image Parameters
Remote Workstation Options

64
Radiographer's Software

Reviewing Images
Once an image is acquired, you may want to review it in detail and possibly make changes
before accepting it. Changes to images are made on the Image Viewer Screen.
To review an acquired image:
1. Select the thumbnail image you would like to review from the Patient Input Screen.
or
From the Main Menu, select Image Review.
The Image List Screen opens.
2. Select the thumbnail image you would like to review.
The Image Viewer Screen opens.
3. In the Image Viewer Screen, select from the palettes of Image Adjustment, Masking,
Markers, Printing, Orientation, Magnification, Look Adjustment, Crop Box Adjustment,
Magnification, and Measurement Tools.
There are Help screens for each of the palettes to explain the Image Viewer functions. On the
Image Viewer Help Screen, select the icon of the function you wish to use to see information
for that function.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen

65
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Adjusting Image Quality

Adjusting Image Parameters Menu


If the image quality is not acceptable, make sure that you selected the correct View. Make sure
you have the best image quality before making a diagnosis.

Adjusting Image Quality Controls


How to Use Window and Level
Increasing Latitude
Image Processing Failure
Reprocessing the Image
Using the Histogram
Using the Image Adjustment Tab
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Viewing More Detail

See also:
Changing the View Name
Modifying a Delivered Image
Viewing More Detail
Low Contrast Images
Increasing Latitude
Reprocessing an Image
Applying Automatic Masking
Applying Manual Masking

66
Radiographer's Software

Adjusting Image Quality Controls

Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions


To change brightness:
Select the top arrow to raise the value and increase the brightness.
Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and decrease the brightness.
To change latitude:
Select the top arrow to raise the value and increase the latitude.
Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and decrease the latitude.
To change detail contrast:
Select the top arrow to increase the value and increase the contrast.
Select the bottom arrow to lower the value and lower the contrast.
To return to the last saved value of all of the slider controls:
1. Select Reset.
2. Select Save Changes when finished making changes.
3. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to destinations.

See also:
Viewing More Detail
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Accept Image Button

67
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

How to Use Window/Level


Use the Window/Level controls to change the brightness and contrast level when normal image
processing fails or is unsatisfactory.
1. At the Window /Level Screen:
Raise the Window slider control to decrease contrast.
Lower the Window slider control to increase the contrast.
Raise the Level slider control to increase the brightness.
Lower the Level slider control to decrease brightness.
2. Select Save Changes.

68
Radiographer's Software

Increasing Latitude
Latitude controls the number of shades of gray visible in the image. Increasing the latitude
increases the number of gray levels, making blacks and whites less apparent. You may want to
increase the latitude if important anatomical information appears in the black or white region of
the image and it cannot be visualized clearly.
Increasing latitude:
Increases the number of gray levels
Decreases the apparent black and white values

See also:
Brightness, latitude, and detail contrast definitions
Adjusting Image Parameters

69
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Processing Failure


If image processing "fails" or does not perform on an image, the Modality will automatically
revert to Window/Level Mode instead of the standard Image Viewer controls, allowing you to
modify the contrast and brightness of the image. The image will appear unusually low in
contrast.

See also:
How to Use Window and Level
Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure
Reprocessing an Image
Using the Histogram

70
Radiographer's Software

Reprocessing the Image


Reprocessing modifies the image by applying the processing changes you have selected. It
does not matter whether the changes were made through masking or View selection.
Changing the mask alters the image data used by the image processing algorithms to do the
image processing.
Reprocessing an image resets the contrast, brightness, and latitude value to the defaults of the
current View Name. When you change the View and select Reprocess Image, the image
processing is performed again using the new image processing parameters for the new View.
Reprocessing is an option that should only be used when you want to change the look of the
image.

Select the Reprocess Image button:


When you are not satisfied with the current look of the image.
When increasing or decreasing the size of the mask to the edge of the collimation.
When masking out unneeded anatomy, to optimize on the visible anatomy.
When poor collimation leaves unwanted objects in the image. Edit the Surround Mask and
reprocess to improve image quality.
When you modify the View Name.
You cannot reprocess an image if the image has been accepted and delivered across the
network. You must create a copy of the image, modify the copy, and send it to the proper
destinations. In addition, an image must be delivered before you can make a copy of it.
When should I not reprocess an image?
Do not reprocess the image if visible collimation lines are desired.

See also:
Modifying a Delivered Image

71
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Histogram


The histogram is a graph of the distributions of pixel values in the image. The X-axis is exposure
from low to high. The Y -axis is frequency of occurrence.
A normal exposure produces an S-shaped curve across the histogram. If image processing fails,
the histogram displays a straight diagonal line and the image displays very low contrast. This is
an indication that no additional image processing has been applied to the image
In Window/Level Mode, the image is displayed without the additional image processing and the
line on the histogram remains a straight diagonal line. It does not become an S-shaped curve.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Image Processing Failure

72
Radiographer's Software

Using the Image Adjustment Tab


You can make the following adjustments on the Image Adjustment Tab:
Brightness
Latitude
Detail Contrast
Reset
Window/Level Mode

See also:
Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions
Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure
Increasing Latitude
Using the Histogram
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Viewing More Detail

73
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Image Viewer Screen


On the Image Viewer Screen, any accessed image in the system appears before modification.
Radiographers or Key Operators can perform any of the functions described on this page before
sending an image to its destination. You can make any of the following changes:
Review an image and decide to accept or reject it.
Make adjustments to the image quality before sending the image to destinations.
Add markers, measurements, or comments to images.
Quickly review an image each time a thumbnail image is selected from anywhere in the system.
Image Viewer Palette Tabs
Select an Image Viewer Palette Tab icon below for detailed instructions on using the Tab.
Image Adjustment Tab (adding brightness, latitude, and detail
contrast)

Markers Tab (adding, moving, and deleting markers)

Surround Mask Tab (applying, moving, and removing surround mask)

View/Look Adjustment Tab (changing views, applying grid


suppression, inverting images, applying noise suppression.)

Crop Box Adjustment Tab (printing True-size images, applying 1 cm


scale)

Print Tab (adding text boxes, rotating, flipping images)

Magnification Tab (pan and zoom)

Comments Tab (adding comments to the image using the keyboard)

74
Radiographer's Software

Measurement Tools (taking orthopedic measurements of distance,


angle, or Cobb angle)

Quick Menu (logging out, shutting down, flagging images for review)

Make sure you select Save Changes before closing the Image Viewer Screen.

See also:
Flagging an Image
Additional Topics

75
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Adjusting for More Detail


You can adjust the amount of detail visible in an image using the Image Quality adjustment.
1. On the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab.
2. Make sure that the selected View is correct for the image you are reviewing. (Selecting an
incorrect View can cause unexpected results from the automatic image processing).
If the View is correct:
1. Select the Image Adjustment Tab.
2. Carefully adjust the brightness, latitude, and detail contrast slider controls to achieve the
optimal appearance of the image.
3. Select Save Changes.
If the View is not correct:
1. Select the View Name field on the View/Look Tab.
2. Select a new View Name from the View/Look Tab.
3. Select Reprocess.

See also:
Adjusting Image Parameters
Adjusting Image Quality Controls
Low Contrast Images due to IPL Parameters Failure
Increasing Latitude
Using the Histogram
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Using the Image Adjustment Tab
Reprocessing an Image
How to Use Window and Level
Flagging an Image
What are Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast?

76
Radiographer's Software

Assigning and Unassigning Images

Assigning an Image
Assigning a View.
1. At the Main Menu, select the Images Not Assigned button.
2. Select the image from the list to open the Image Viewer Screen.
3. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Look/Adjustment Tab.
4. Select the View Name field to correctly designate the appropriate body-part specific algorithm.
5. Select Reprocess Image.
6. Select Save Changes.
Assigning an image to the Patient
1. Select Assign Image. Assign the image to a patient.
2. At the Patient Query Screen:
Enter the search criteria to search for the correct patient.
or
Select New Patient.
3. Select Add View.
If New Patient was selected, enter the patient information.
4. Select Save Changes.
The image is assigned. The Patient Input Screen opens.

See also:
Assigning an Image to a Different Patient
How an Image Becomes Unassigned
Unassigning an Image

77
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Assigning an Image to a Different Patient


You can move an image from one patient to another by unassigning it from one patient and
reassigning it to another.
1. Open the image to be moved from the Image Viewer Screen.
2. Select the Unassign Image button.
3. Select the Assign Image button.
4. At the Patient Query Screen:
Enter the search criteria to select the correct patient
or
Select New Patient.
5. Select Add View.
6. If New Patient was selected, enter the patient information.
7. Save Changes.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Assigning an Image
Unassigning an Image

78
Radiographer's Software

How an Image Becomes Unassigned


Unassigned images occur when:
The cassette is scanned without first associating the cassette with a patient, such as in a trauma
situation.
A View icon is not selected when an image is scanned and the auto-associate feature is
enabled.
The image is manually unassigned from the original patient.
Unassigned images must be assigned to a patient before delivery.

See also:
Assigning an Image
Unassigning an Image
Assigning an Image to a Different Patient

79
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Unassigning an Image
To unassign an image from a patient ID or from a trauma ID:
1. Select the image to be unassigned.
The image opens in the Image Viewer Screen.
2. Select Unassign Image.
The patient information is removed from the image. The image information is retained with
the image.

See also:
Assigning an Image
How an Image Becomes Unassigned
Assigning an Image to a Different Patient

80
Radiographer's Software

Cropping Images

Using the Crop Box Adjustment Tab


The Crop Box Adjustment Tab lets you change the way the image prints.
To use the Crop Box Adjustment Tab:
Select the check box or button for the appropriate feature and select Save Changes.
True Size Prints the image True-size.
Manual Crop Lets you adjust how much anatomy is displayed on the film. The
area inside of the crop box determines what is displayed. You
can drag the corners of the crop box to change the size of the
box. Use the arrows to adjust the position of the crop box.
Best Fit Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise to maximize
film usage.
1 cm Scale Displays and prints reference marks at 1 cm intervals to help you
evaluate image size. The system places the scale on two
adjacent sides of 1-up or a Multi-format print .
Crop Box Changes the crop box from a lengthwise position to a crosswise
Orientation position
Arrows Moves the crop box to another part of the image as you select
the arrows.

81
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

See also:
Creating a True-size Print
Using Manual Cropping
Creating Multi-format Prints

82
Radiographer's Software

Using Manual Cropping


Manual Cropping lets you adjust the amount of anatomy that is displayed on the film. The area
inside the crop box determines the display. The aspect ratio of the crop box depends on the film
size selected. You can enlarge the crop box to include more anatomy, but it will reduce the
magnification.
1. From the Main Menu, select Image Review.
2. Select an image to open the Image Viewer Screen.
3. Select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab.
You can drag the edges of the crop box to change the size of the box, use the arrows to
adjust the position of the crop box.
4. Select Save Changes.

See also:

83
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using Manual Cropping on a Multi-format Print 1. Make sure that the image is
included in a multi-format layout. If it is not, the cropping choices for multi-format will be grayed
out.
2. Select one of the following:
True-size
Manual Crop
Best Fit

You can mix cropping selections from the 1-up and multi-format menus on the Crop Box
Adjustment tab. For example, you can select True-size for 1-up and Manual Crop for the multi-
format print. Both crop boxes are displayed.

84
Radiographer's Software

Delivering Images

Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery


The Key Operator, Applications Consultant, or Service Engineer configures the Modality for one
of the following operating modes:
Pass-through mode: all images are routed directly to destinations without inspection.
QA mode: all images are inspected and approved before sending to destinations. Within QA
mode, you can configure the system to automatically open an image in the Image Viewer
Screen after it has been processed.
Auto QA by Image mode: the console automatically transfers from image acquisition to the
Image Viewer Screen once the image is captured. You do not need to select the thumbnail to
open the Image Viewer Screen. All images are inspected and approved before sending to
destinations.
QA by Study: all images in a study (DR Systems only) are manually inspected and approved
before sending to destinations.
Select Accept Image to send the image to destinations.

See also:
Unusable Image
Viewing a Thumbnail Image
QA by Image Mode
Pass-through Mode

85
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Viewing a Thumbnail Image


Select the study from the Study List on the Patient Input Screen.
The thumbnail images from that study appear across the bottom half of the screen.
To view an image that appears as a thumbnail:
Select a thumbnail image to open it automatically in the Image Viewer.
If you make changes to an image that require reprocessing, such as masking, orientation, or
annotation with markers, the thumbnail image always reflects the saved changes.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen

86
Radiographer's Software

Study Data
Auto Display in QA Mode
When you are operating in QA Mode, you can configure the system to automatically open an
image in the Image Viewer Screen after the image is processed instead of selecting the image
manually to inspect it.

For the Key Operator to configure QA by Image Mode:


1. Select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Delivery Preferences.
2. At the Delivery Preferences Screen, select Auto Display in QA Mode.
3. Select Save Changes.

See also:
Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery
Pass-through Mode

87
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Pass-through Mode
In Pass-through mode: all images are routed directly to destinations without inspection.
When Pass-through mode is configured, you can select the Pause the Pass-through function
on the Scan Status Screen to inspect an image.
Select Resume Pass-through to continue scanning and to allow images to go to destinations
without inspection. When the system distributes the image, you can recall the image for review
at that time, if necessary.
In QA mode, the radiographer must view and approve the image before distributing it across
the network.

See also:
QA Mode
Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery

88
Radiographer's Software

Auto Display in QA Mode


If your system is configured for QA Mode, you must review and accept the image before
distributing it to the selected destinations. You may choose to accept images individually
following review of each, or all together after reviewing them all.
Acceptance by Image
To review and accept individual images:
1. After acquisition, a thumbnail image appears on the Patient Input Screen.
2. Select the thumbnail image to display it for review on the Image Viewer Screen.
3. Select Accept Image to send the image to the appropriate network destinations.
Acceptance by Study
To review and accept all images in the study:
1. After acquisition, thumbnail images appear on the Patient Input Screen.
2. Select one of the images to open the image on the Image Viewer Screen.
3. View the other thumbnail images using the arrow buttons to on the Patient Information Bar
4. Select the Patient Information Bar to return to the Patient Input Screen after reviewing all of the
images.
5. Select Accept All to send all the images to the selected destinations.

See also:
Destination Status Button

89
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Storage Commitment Function


When you send an image to a destination, there is no guarantee that the image was stored to
the hard drive. Sending the image means that the Modality transmitted the image to the PACS.
With Storage Commitment enabled, a delivered image is successfully saved by the PACS
and the Modality receives a confirmation that the image has been received and stored.
The destination must support Storage Commitment for the Modality to use this feature. This
feature is enabled by Service.

90
Radiographer's Software

Distributing Images

Sending Images to a Different Location


1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select Select Destination.
2. Select a different or additional destination from the screen.
3. Select the check box of the new destination.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Select Back.
6. Select Accept to deliver the image to printers and workstations.
You can only configure multiple copies for hard copy (printer) devices.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Accepting the Image

91
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Distributing the Image


Images can be sent to destinations:
Automatically, which can be configured by the Key Operator based on the Destination Profile
filters (Body Part, Physician, Cassette Size, etc).
Manually, by the radiographer selecting the destination using the Select Destination button.

See also:
Automatic Delivery or Manual Delivery
Destination Status Button
Change Destination Profile Button

92
Radiographer's Software

Entering and Deleting Data

Auto-Associating Information
On the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic/Elite CR Systems and CR 825/850 Systems, the Key
Operator can configure the machine to automatically associate the Cassette Identity to a View
icon, which eliminates the need to use an external bar-code scanner for this purpose. The
Modality must be operating independently from a Remote Operations Panel (ROP). If a ROP is
defined as an external device to one of the Modalities, the Auto-Associate button will not be
enabled. Conversely, when Auto-Associate is enabled and a ROP is added, the Auto-Associate
button will be disabled. To turn ON the Auto-Associate feature, go to Key Operator Functions
> System Configuration > Next Page > Scanner Options > and check the Auto-Associate
Enabled check box.
To initiate Auto-Associate from the Patient Input Screen:
1. Select a View.
For an image to be auto-associated with a View, the desired View must be selected
(highlighted)and displayed on the Patient Input Screen at the time of scanning until the bar-
code appears in the View icon.
2. Insert the cassette.
When the cassette is scanned, the image is automatically associated with the View icon that
was selected (highlighted) when the scan began. The system automatically highlights the
next View after the cassette scanning process has started.
3. Insert the next cassette.
4. Repeat until each View is scanned.
Each cassette will be associated automatically with the View that was selected when the
cassette was inserted.
Make sure that the View you want to scan is selected (highlighted) before inserting the cassette.
If you do not select a View prior to inserting the cassette, an Unassigned Image will result.
If a cassette is bar-coded accidentally, the information will not be used by the system if the
Auto-Associate feature is enabled. The image file that is sent to other devices will contain the
cassette ID of the cassette that was scanned, not the cassette ID that was accidentally read
using the bar code scanner.

See also:
Scanning on a Classic/Elite CR System
Scanning on a CR 825/850 System
Assigning an Image

93
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Creating an Additional Study


Select the New Study button to create an additional study for the patient currently displayed on
the Patient Input Screen.
The patient information is copied from the current study.
The Accession Number, Procedure Code, and Patient Location fields, among others, are left
blank.
Both old and new studies appear in the study list on the right side of the Patient Input Screen.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen
New Study Button
Defining a View
How to End a Study

94
Radiographer's Software

Displaying the Procedures List


Both the Procedure Code field and the Procedure Name field contain the 3-tabbed Procedure
Keyboards and the alphabetical keyboard. The Procedure Name field displays the Procedure
Keyboard first.
To display the Procedure List quickly, select the Procedure Name field.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

95
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Displaying Other Studies for a Patient


If a patient has other studies stored on the system, they are displayed as large rectangular icons
in the lower right quadrant of the Patient Input Screen. Use the Up and Down arrows, if
necessary, to display the full listing. Selecting an icon enters that study information into the
Patient Input Screen.
To display more than 10 images for a patient:
Use the Up and Down arrows located to the right of the image thumbnails to scroll the display of
image icons when necessary.
The current page number and total number of pages are displayed on the scroll bar.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

96
Radiographer's Software

Displaying Image Icons


Image icons on the Patient Input Screen may be displayed as gold tutor images, skeletal
drawings, or in CR Systems, as cassette icons. The display configuration depends on the
configuration chosen by the Key Operator.
Tutor image CR Cassette non-tube side CR Cassette image back,
(back) tube side (front)

The CR Cassette non-tube side (back) is displayed when a View is automatically flipped (such
as Chest-PA-Erect).
The CR Cassette tube side (front) is displayed when a view is not automatically flipped (such as
Chest-AP-Erect).

97
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Modifying Information
You can modify the patient, exam, and image data at any time up until the image is delivered.
To modify information from the Patient Input Screen:
1. Select a field.
2. Select Backspace.
3. Enter the correct information from the keyboard.
To modify information from the Patient Query Screen:
1. Select a field.
2. Select Backspace.
or
Select the Clear All Fields button on the bottom of the screen to delete information in all the
fields.
All fields that have pre-defined values will be reset to the default value when you select the
Clear All Fields button.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the Patient Query Screen

98
Radiographer's Software

How to End a Study


When all of the images have been acquired and accepted, you should end the study.
Select the End Study button on the Patient Input Screen.
If your system is using Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS) for Scheduled Workflow,
selecting the End Study button sends a message to the HIS/RIS Modality Performed
Procedure Step Manager that the procedure has ended, and changes the status of the exam
in the Modality.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

99
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Entering Temporary Trauma Patient Data for Performing a


Trauma Exam
The Trauma button displays the pre-configured trauma patients that have been set up by the
Key Operator. If your system is configured for the optional Trauma feature, the required fields
on the Patient Input Screen populate quickly in emergency situations.
To perform a Trauma exam:
1. Select Study Data.
2. Select Trauma from the Patient Query Screen.
3. Select an exam from the Trauma Tab.
The default patient information and the selected exam information fills in automatically on
the Patient Input Screen.
Enter the actual patient information when it becomes available on the Patient Input Screen. If
the image is delivered, you must unassign the image from the Trauma ID and assign the image
to the correct patient information.

See also:
Assigning an Image
Assigning an Image to a Different Patient
Using the Patient Input Screen

100
Radiographer's Software

Entering Additional Exam Information


Additional exam information is information that the Key Operator has decided not to require in
order to proceed with the patient's exam. You can complete the patient's record with this
information omitted.
The fields are configurable by the Key Operator, depending on the need and on the layout
selected by the facility. Enter optional information from the three tabbed palettes as shown
below on the Patient Input Screen. The chart offers guidance for each category.

Exam Information
Patient Last Name Required
Patient First Name Optional
Patient ID Required
Gender Male, Female, other
Date of Birth Patient's date of birth
Patient Location Room
Department Name Select from user-defined list or enter from keyboard
Referring Physician Select from user-defined list or enter from keyboard
Priority Low, routine, urgent, STAT
Study Date Entered automatically
Procedure Name Select from tabbed palette, Thorax, Contrast Studies,
Spine, Upper Extremity, Cranium, Abdomen, etc.
Procedure Code Enter from keyboard
Accession Number Enter from keyboard or bar-code
Tech ID Read bar-code ID, select from user-defined list or enter
from keyboard

More Information
Patient Comments Enter from keyboard
Contrast Agent Enter from keyboard

101
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Modality Enter from keyboard


Procedure Step Enter from keyboard
Description
Requested Procedure Enter from keyboard
Description
Procedure ID Enter from keyboard

More Image Data


Body Part Enter from keyboard
View Position Enter from keyboard
Patient Position Enter from keyboard
Laterality Enter from keyboard
Image Comments Enter from keyboard

See also:
List Configuration

102
Radiographer's Software

Resolving Cassette ID Errors


If you see the error Cassette ID Bar-code Read Failed, it means that the internal bar-code
scanner cannot read the cassette bar-code label. The cause is most often a degraded bar-code
label, not an issue with the equipment.
Select cancel from the dialog box to eject the cassette and try to reinsert the cassette.
or
Select the cassette type/size from the dialog box.
Contact Service to repair the bar-code label.
If a duplicate Cassette ID is entered:
You will receive a warning message and must choose one of the following:
Select Cancel New Image Information to use a different cassette for the exam.
Select Cancel Old Image Information to remove the cassette ID from the unacquired image in
the previous study.
If the Cassette ID field turns red:
The field turns red if the cassette ID is invalid. A valid cassette ID is a 10 digit number that
begins with the number 9.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

103
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Patient Input Screen


The Patient Input Screen has many functions. Image icons display when a scanned cassette is
associated with a patient name. You can:
Enter Patient information
Perform Workflows
Display a patient study
Edit Patient information with the Editing Button
Review a selected image in the Image Viewer Screen
Accept an image and send it to destinations such as workstations or printers
To scan an image on the Patient Input Screen:
1. Create a study or select a View.
The View icon is highlighted.
2. Scan the cassette. The progress of the scan is displayed in the thumbnail border.
3. The next unavailable View icon is automatically selected. If another View icon does not exist, the
user may create another icon.
Select a blue link from the list below for information about the Patient Input Screen.
Beginning a Patient Exam
Completing an Exam Set-up
Ending a Study
Automated Procedure Code Mapping
Displaying Image Icons
Deleting Information
Resolving a Cassette ID Error
Using the More Image Data Tab
Using the More Information Tab

See also:
Auto-Associating Information
Creating an Additional Study

104
Radiographer's Software

More Image Data


The More Image Data Tab on the Patient Input Screen contains additional data elements that
show how the image was acquired. The Key Operator can change the layout of this screen in
Key Operator Functions > Layout Configuration > Patient Input
You can change the patient, exam, and image data at any time up until the image is delivered.
Use the keyboard to enter the following information, if available:
kVp Refers to peak kilo-volts used in the X-ray exposure
mAs Milliampere seconds, derived by multiplying the
milliampere by time. Controls the quantity of x-
radiation produced during an exposure.
Source to Image Distance Enter the distance from the X-ray source to the
(SID) center of the detector or cassette. This exposure
information is needed for Long-Length Imaging and
DR Systems.
Source to Patient Distance Enter the distance from the X-ray source to the
patient.
Image Comments Enter comments concerning the image, such as
"inspiration" or "10 minute image".
Patient Position Enter the patient location.

The new feature is to let you edit image data after the image has been scanned and processed.
To edit a processed image:
1. Select Edit Image Data.
After scanning the image(s), the Patient Input Screen appears.
2. Select Edit Image Data.
The button changes to Edit Is On.
3. Select a thumbnail image and then select any of the input tabs on the Patient Input Screen
You will be in edit mode and can add or change selected fields of information.

To end the edit mode:


Select the Edit Image Data a second time.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen

105
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Layout Configuration
Determining the Exposure Index

106
Radiographer's Software

More Information
The More Information tab on the Patient Input Screen contains additional patient information.
Use the keyboard to enter the following information, if available:
Referring Physician Primary physician who referred patient.
Patient Comments Comments the patient makes concerning his or her exam.
Procedure Step The procedure step used in this study.
Description
Requested Procedure A code the RIS provides to identify a study.
ID
Requested Procedure The name the RIS provides to identify a study.
Description

See also:
Layout Configuration
Using the Patient Input Screen

107
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Orientation and Appearance

Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab


The View/Look Adjustment Tab lets you select a new View Name if the current View Name
assigned to the image is producing poor results. Each View Name carries with it contrast and
brightness settings, latitude and noise settings that determine what the image will look like. If the
View Name is not assigned to the correct View, the results will be unsatisfactory.
To change settings on the View/Look Adjustment Tab:
1. Select the View Name field if the current View is incorrect for the image and enter a new name.
2. Select the Invert Grayscale check box to display the black areas of the image as white and the
white areas as black.
This may be helpful when identifying line placements.
3. Select the Grid Suppression check box to suppress grid lines from the image.
4. Select the Noise Suppression check box to reduce the appearance of noise in low exposure
areas.

See also:
Reducing Noise
Using Grid Suppression Software
Reversing the Image
Using the Image Viewer Screen

108
Radiographer's Software

Reducing Noise
Noise is density that appears in low exposure areas of an image. Noise is generally unwanted
and can make it difficult to see important detail in an image. Noise Suppression Software can
reduce or eliminate unwanted noise without adversely affecting the rest of the image. The Key
Operator can configure this feature.
Use Noise Suppression to reduce the amount of apparent noise in low exposure areas of the
image.
To apply noise suppression:

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab .


2. Select the Noise Suppression check box.
3. Select Save Changes.
This feature selectively applies a noise suppression algorithm to only those areas of the
image with low exposure.
When you apply Noise Suppression, the improved low exposure areas appear clearer and
smoother.

See also:
Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab
Using the Image Viewer Screen

109
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using Grid Suppression Software


Grid Suppression Software is an optional feature that can detect the presence of a grid and
can suppress the visual effects of grid lines. The Key Operator can configure this feature.
Use this feature to automatically suppress:
Visible grid artifacts on the monitor when viewing CR/DR images.
Moir patterns when the image is minified and reduced line artifacts when the image is
magnified.
To apply Grid Suppression:

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the View/Look Adjustment Tab .


2. Select the Grid Suppression check box.
3. Select Save Changes.

To remove Grid Suppression:


1. Clear the Grid Suppression check box.
2. Select Save Changes.

See also:
Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab
Using the Image Viewer Screen

110
Radiographer's Software

Magnification Tab
The Magnification Tab lets you change the level of magnification you see in the image
displayed in the Image Viewer window and move the view by selecting different points on the
screen.
To use the Magnification Tab:
1. Select the zoom level (200%, 100%, 50%, 25%).
2. Move the area of view by selecting the image, the thumbnail, or the arrows, or by dragging
across the image.
3. Increase or decrease the magnification of the image for viewing on the Modality.
4. Select Fit to Screen:
To exit Pan and Zoom mode.
To make all areas of the image accessible for viewing.

Zoom Level is based on normal screen view.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen

111
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Rotating and Flipping the Image


Rotating and flipping the image lets you change the orientation of an image before it is sent to
destinations.
1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab.
2. To rotate the image clockwise, select the Rotate CW button. To rotate the image counter
clockwise, select the Rotate CCW button.
The image rotates in increments of 90 degrees.
You can see the change in the Image Viewer window.
3. To flip the image, select the Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical button.
You can see the change in the Image Viewer window.
4. Select Save Changes.
The change you make to image orientation appears at the destination.

See also:
Using the Print Tab
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen
Printing an Image
Using the Image Viewer Screen

112
Radiographer's Software

Reversing the Image


At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Invert Grayscale check box.
The reversal image provides an alternate view of image detail.
o To print the image, select Save & Accept Image.
o To remove the effect, clear the Invert Grayscale check box.

See also:
Using the View/Look Adjustment Tab
Using the Image Viewer Screen

113
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Comment Tab


The Comment Tab allows the radiographer or Key Operator to create a record of comments
about the image.
In addition, the Comment Tab lets you edit the laterality of an image after it is acquired. This is
important if the image was flipped or rotated in the Image Viewer or if the laterality had not
been noted elsewhere.
1. Select the Image Comments box.
2. Use the Keyboard to enter the comment.
3. Select Save Changes.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen

114
Radiographer's Software

Image Review
Review Needed Status
Occasionally, EVP Plus Software may not fully predict the parameters for an image. When this
happens, it produces a Review Needed status.
To use the Review Needed Status:
Check the contrast and brightness of the image.
For images with the Review Needed Status, you have access to the brightness, latitude, and
detail contrast controls to correct the image in the Image Viewer Screen.
Review Needed should not be confused with Need Approval, which is a status of images
which have not yet been approved and are waiting for destinations. Need Approval is located on
the Image List Screen.

See also:
Adjusting Image Quality Controls
Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast Definitions
Using the Image List Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen

115
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Markers

Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Adding the Text Marker
Moving a Marker
Removing a Marker
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Using the Others Markers
Using the Time Markers

116
Radiographer's Software

Adding Markers
You can add an unlimited number of markers to an image. Once a marker is added to an image,
it will be visible when it is sent to a destination.
1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Markers Tab.
2. Select the type icon as indicated in the table below.
3. Select the desired location on the image.
4. Select Save Changes.
Favorites Markers Group

Others Markers Group

Measures Markers Group

Time Markers Group

User-created Markers Group

.
The marker remains in place until you change its position.
When you add a Free-Form Text marker, use the keyboard to enter text in the Free-form text
field. You must select Enter every time the Free-Form text field is changed.

117
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

See also:
How do I add a free-form text marker?
Using the Markers Tab

118
Radiographer's Software

Adding the Text Marker


The free-form text marker lets you add 32 characters of text to the image.
You can add the text marker to an image or change the marker already in place.
The text marker becomes part of the image and is retained when sent to destinations.
To add a free-form text marker:
1. From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Markers Tab.
2. Enter the desired information in the Text field from the keyboard for your system.
3. Select the desired location on the image.
To remove the text marker:
1. Select the Text marker on the image.
2. Select the trash can.

See also:
Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Removing a Marker
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Using the Others Markers
Using the Time Markers

119
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Moving a Marker
1. Select the marker on the image.
The marker is highlighted when selected.
2. Select a new location.

See also:
Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Adding the Text Marker
Removing a Marker
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Using the Others Markers
Using the Time Markers

120
Radiographer's Software

Image Review
Removing a Marker
A marker can be removed from an image before or after it is saved to the Modality database.
1. Select a marker on the image. The marker is highlighted when selected.
2. Select the trash can.

See also:
Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Using the Others Markers
Using the Time Markers
Adding the Text Marker

121
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Review
Using the Favorites Markers

1. Select Favorites by selecting the icon.


2. Select a position marker such as Left or Right, and select the image to place the marker.
3. Select the arrow to apply an arrow marker.
4. Select the arrow again to change the direction of the arrow.

To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image and then select the trash
can.

See also:
Adding the Text Marker
Using the Others Markers
Using the Time Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Removing a Marker

122
Radiographer's Software

Image Review
Using the Measures Markers
The Measures Markers include markers for different positions, including:
15, 30, 45, 60, and 90
Semi-supine
Semi-erect
L Lat Decub
R Lat Decub
Oblique
MLO
CC
Scout
Post Reduction
To use the Measures Markers:
To place a marker on the image, select the marker name on the palette and then select a point
on the image to locate it.
To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image and then select the trash
can.

123
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Review
Using the Others Marker Group

1. Select Others by selecting the icon.


2. Select a marker from the markers on the palette.
3. Select a point on the image to locate it.
The Others Markers Group includes:
Flexion
Internal
Inspiration
Wt Bearing
Axial
Stress
Extension
External
Expiration
Post Contrast
Prelim
Erect

124
Radiographer's Software

To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image, then select the trash can.

See also:
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Time Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Markers Menu
Adding Markers
Adding the Text Marker
Removing a Marker

125
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Review
Using the Time Markers

1. Select the Time Markers by selecting the icon.


2. Select the Time interval marker and select a point on the image to locate it.
Time intervals include 15 and 30 seconds, 1 minute to 60 minutes, and 2 hours to 24 hours.

To delete a marker from the image, select the marker on the image and then select the trash
can.

See also:
Using the Favorites Markers
Using the Others Markers
Using the Measures Markers
Applying Markers
Adding Markers
Adding the Text Marker
Removing a Marker

126
Radiographer's Software

Masking

Using the Surround Mask Tab


Surround Mask causes the unexposed areas around the image to be displayed black and
makes soft tissue and low contrast detail more visible. Mask placement normally corresponds to
the placement of collimator blades.
Make adjustments as desired.
Show Mask Applies Automatic Surround Mask and makes it visible.
Edit Mask Applies Manual Surround Mask and adjusts the mask.
Select the check box to apply.
Circle or Rectangle Locates where on the image the mask must be applied.
Controls
Arrows Moves the mask shape you created to another area of the
image.
Reset Returns the mask to the last saved Surround Masking
position.
Set to Corners Places the mask points in the four corners of the image.
Use this feature if there is a Surround Mask failure and you
want to enlarge the mask quickly, or if you move a point off
the image and you cannot get it back.
Single-Exposure Overrides masking when the system interprets a single
Image exposure as multiple images, or improperly masks multiple
exposures on a single image. This feature can be
configured in View Configuration to treat certain (or all)
views always as single exposures.

127
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

See also:
Masking Failure
Applying Automatic Masking
Mask Points Are Off the Screen
Applying Manual Masking
Reprocessing After Using a Mask

128
Radiographer's Software

Masking Failure
When Automatic Surround Mask fails, apply Manual Surround Mask.

See also:
Applying Manual Masking
Mask Points Are Off the Screen
Reprocessing After Using a Mask

129
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Applying Automatic Surround Mask (optional)


Surround Mask reduces viewing flare. The mask helps you see soft tissue and low contrast
information. Automatic mask placement normally corresponds to the placement of collimator
blades.
To apply automatic Surround Mask:
If you have the optional Automatic Surround Mask feature, automatic mask is ON by default.
The Show Mask check box is checked.

See also:
Using the Surround Mask Tab
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Applying Manual Masking
Reprocessing After Using a Mask
Mask Points Are Off the Screen
Reducing Noise
Using Grid Suppression Software
Adjusting Image Parameters

130
Radiographer's Software

Mask Points Are Off the Screen


To find a mask point when it is off the image, you can change the magnification so you can see
the points.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Magnification Tab .


2. Select 25% zoom.
3. Select the Surround Tab.
4. Select Edit Mask.
5. Move the circular or rectangular control points on the mask on the smaller image.

See also:
Applying Manual Masking
Reprocessing After Using a Mask

131
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Applying Manual Surround Mask (optional)


Manual Surround Mask is used when Automatic Surround Masking is not sufficient.
1. From the Image Viewer Screen on the Surround Mask Tab, check the Edit Mask check box.
2. To change the shape of the mask:
Select a circle (corner) or rectangle (side) on the mask, then drag it to another location.
Select a side and select another location on the image.
Use the green arrows on the editor to move a selected side or edge.
3. Select Reprocess.
4. Select Save Changes.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Applying Automatic Masking
Mask Points Are Off the Screen
Reprocessing After Using a Mask
Adjusting Image Parameters

132
Radiographer's Software

Reprocessing After Using Edit Mask


The Reprocess Image button becomes active when you modify the Surround Mask with Edit
Mask. The Region of Interest (ROI) is redefined based on the current location of the mask if
you select the Reprocess Image button. This may improve the appearance of the image, but
not as much as collimating to the body part.

See also:
Region of Interest Tool
Reprocessing the Image

133
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Measurement Tools

Using Measurement Tools


This feature provides tools that let you make measurements on the image. It is accessed from

the Image Viewer Screen .The Measurement Tools calculate angles and distances
between specified points at the film plane. The system does not make adjustments to the
measurements based on the relative positions of the tube, patient and CR cassette. The
reported values from the measurements are directly calculated at the detector plane without any
compensation of geometric magnification.

Three different measurement tools are available. Select the Tool Icon below to see a sample of
the tools.
Tool Function Directions for Use
Measures the Select the Distance icon on the Measurement
distance Tools Tab.
between two
Select a point to anchor the tool.
points.
Distance Select another point on the image to form the
line.
To move the Distance Tool, use the directional
arrows on the Measurement Tool Tab to move
the line.
To change the Distance Tool, select the points
and select another location on the image.
To remove the Distance Tool, select the line on
the image and then select the trash can.

134
Radiographer's Software

Measures an Select the Angle icon on the Measurement


angle from Tools Tab.
three selected
Select the first, second, and third points on the
points on the
image to form the drawing of the angle.
Angle image.
To move the Angle Tool, use the directional
arrows on the Measurement Tool Tab.
To change the Angle Tool, select the points
and select another location for each point.
To remove the Angle Tool, select the angle on
the image and then select the trash can.
Measures the Select the Cobb Angle icon on the
angle of Measurement Tools Tab. The Cobb Angle
intersection measures curved shapes such as hips or
between two spines.
Cobb lines drawn on
Angle Select a point on the image.
the image.
Used to Select a second point to form a line.
determine the Select another point on the image.
angle of a
curve. Select a second point to form a second line. The
Cobb Angle is calculated for the arc between
two lines.
To move the Cobb Angle Tool, use the
directional arrows on the Measurement Tool
Tab.
To change the Cobb Angle, select the points in
the lines and drag to another location.
To remove the Cobb Angle, select the angle or
lines on the image and then select the trash can.

See also:
Measurement Tool Sample

135
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Measurement Tool Sample

136
Radiographer's Software

Optimizing the Exam

Performing the Exam


What size cassette should I use?
Use the smallest cassette capable of fully including the anatomy.
What is collimation? Why should I do it?
Collimation means to manually adjust the size of the X-ray field so that the area exposed and
imaged by the X-ray is just that area necessary for the diagnosis.
Collimation decreases scatter, increases detail and contrast, and helps optimize the image
processing software by determining the correct area of interest on the screen.
Collimation is very important to your initial exposure. Apply as much as is practically possible.

Why should I use lead behind the patient?


Use lead behind the patient to reduce X-ray scatter.
For example, you can improve Lateral L-Spine images with careful collimation. Place a strip of
lead behind the patient to decrease scatter.

How should I expose for soft tissue?


Use normal technique factors for Images exposed for soft tissue (lateral soft tissue neck).
Should I put more than one image on a cassette?
Typically, capture only one image per cassette, such as a Posteroanterior (PA) hand on one
cassette, and a Lateral hand on a separate cassette.
When you put more than one exposure on a cassette:
Leave a small gap of unexposed area between two consecutive images. The width of the gap
should be greater than 0.5 in.(1.27 cm) but smaller than 1.0 in. (2.54 cm).
Avoid overlapping the exposure fields.
Place the exposure fields close to the cassette center.
Expose all of the images in the same orientation and in similar size.
Large gaps between images and overlapping fields can adversely affect the image contrast and
masking.
Another option is to create a multi-format image. See What Is Multi-format Printing?

How are multi-exposure cassettes processed?


1. Separate the images using Surround Masking.
2. Process each image separately.

See also:

137
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

More Image Data


Determining the Exposure Index

138
Radiographer's Software

Improving Acquisition Techniques


How can I improve my image quality?
Choose the appropriate cassette size.
Choose the appropriate View.
Guidelines for Good Exposures
Reduce back-scatter radiation.
Reduce off-focus radiation.
Make sure collimator blades are working efficiently.
Use grids when appropriate.
Use good collimation practices. Be mindful of the cathode/anode orientation and heel effect.

See also:
Changing Image Processing Preferences

139
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Determining the Exposure Index


What is the Exposure Index (EI)?
The Exposure Index (EI) is the average code value for the area that the image processing
software determined was the Region of Interest.
If the system used the incorrect Region of Interest, the EI value may be inaccurate.
The EI is affected by exposure, kVp, collimation, the View chosen for processing, and filtration in
the X-ray tube.
Under standard X-ray beam conditions, 80 kVp with 0.5 mm Cu and 1.0 mm AL filtration at the
tube, the relationship between EI and the cassette incident exposure level mR is EI = 1000 x log
10 (mR) + 2000.
For example, at 1.0 mR exposure level the EI should be 2000. Every time the dose is
doubled or halved, the Exposure Index will increase or decrease by 300.
Use EI as a guide, not as an absolute value.

What should the EI value be?


Users should define the exposure techniques for acceptable image quality, then define the EI
range guidance for a variety of exam types. Typical EI ranges can be from 1500 to 1800.

What do I do if the EI is too low?


If the EI is too low make sure these kVp guidelines are used:
Make sure that the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image
quality controls first.
Use a minimum of 55 kVp on extremities.
Use 85 - 90 kVp for average sized non-grid portable chests.
Because the EI is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible that the processing
has failed to correctly report the EI.
A lower EI may mean that the exposure factors were not adequate and the image will be noisy,
grainy, or mottled.

What do I do if the EI is too high?


Check to see if the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image
quality controls first.
Because the Exposure Index (EI) is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible
that the processing has failed to correctly report the EI.
A higher Exposure Index may indicate that a large amount of radiation struck the cassette. Often
this happens when a large cassette is used for an exam such as a cross-table lateral hip or
when collimation is not adequate.

140
Radiographer's Software

If an exam is not collimated closely, direct areas of exposure may adversely affect the image
processing and consequently the final image.

Why might my image look light when the exposure is high?


A light image could be caused by the following:
An excessive dose could cause image processing to fail.
Misidentification of the region of interest. The EI is the average code value of the region of
interest if the direct exposure regions have been identified as the Region of Interest.

Why is the EI so high? I did not overexpose it!


A high EI may be caused by a misidentification of the Region of Interest in the image
processing. Reasons for this may include
excessive scatter
poor collimation

See also:
What do I do if the EI is too high?
Check to see if the image quality is acceptable for diagnosis. If not, try adjusting the image
quality controls first.
Because the Exposure Index (EI) is calculated by image processing algorithms, it is possible
that the processing has failed to correctly report the EI.
A higher Exposure Index may indicate that a large amount of radiation struck the cassette. Often
this happens when a large cassette is used for an exam such as a cross-table lateral hip or
when collimation is not adequate.
If an exam is not collimated closely, direct areas of exposure may adversely affect the image
processing and consequently the final image.

141
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Patient CD

Study Data
Patient CD (optional)
Patient CD is an optional feature that lets you easily create a CD (or DVD) of a single patient
study, or all studies for a single patient. The images recorded on the CD are in both a DICOM
DIR format and JPEG (.jpg) format. The Patient CD lets you transport images easily and allows
viewing by anyone having a computer with a DICOM Viewer.
You can compose a Patient CD on a Console or a Remote Operations Panel, but the media is
actually created at the Console containing the CD writer. Only CR Systems having this optional
feature will display the Patient CD Queue Screen or the Write Patient CD menu option in the
Quick Menu.
Creating a Patient CD does not interfere with normal CR System operations. There is no effect
on the Graphic User Interface (GUI) and the time it takes to move from screen to screen.
How to delete a Patient CD job:
1. From the Patient CD Jobs Screen, select the job you would like to delete.
2. Select Remove from List.
You can view images on a personal computer using DICOM Viewer software (available free at
http://medical.nema.org/).
To create a Patient CD:
1. Select a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD. Images cannot be appended to other sessions.
2. On the Patient Input Screen, create a patient record and acquire images.
3. Select the Quick Menu.
4. Select Write Patient CD.
5. If multiple studies were created, a pop-up message asks you to select one of the following:
Write all images in this study to CD; Only save images for the opened study.
Write all images from all studies to CD; Save images for all studies for this patient.
6. Select OK.
The CD request is added to the Patient CD Jobs queue.
7. Either select the Disc icon at the top of the page or select the Quick Menu > Patient CD Jobs
List to enter the Patient CD Jobs Menu (also located in Main Menu > Utilities > Patient CD
Jobs).
8. The PatientCD Jobs Screen appears.
9. If multiple CD jobs exist, select the desired row from the list and select Write To CD.
The status for th3e selected job changes from Ready > Burn CD > Burning CD > Done.
10. Select the Back button to return to the Utilities Menu.
To return to the Patient Input Screen, use the Quick Menu to select the Patient Record.

142
Radiographer's Software

Writing images to the Patient CD does not change the delivery status of any image.
When you are performing a Backup and Restore function, make sure that the user at the ROP
does not initiate a Patient CD.

To automatically create a Patient CD:


1. Select Key Operator Function > System Configuration > Delivery Preferences > Write
Patient CDs Immediately.
2. Select a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD. Images cannot be appended to other sessions.
3. On the Patient Input Screen, create a patient record and acquire images.
4. Select the Quick Menu.
5. Select Write Patient CD.
If blank media is not loaded, a "Please insert a writable CD" pop-up message appears.
Load a blank, non-formatted CD or DVD.

Select OK.

The Disc icon at the top of the page changes to a burning disc icon.

Writing images to the Patient CD does not change the delivery status of any image. When you
are performing a Backup and Restore function, make sure that the user at the ROP does not
initiate a Patient CD.

143
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Printing

Using the Print Tab


The Print Tab lets you change the orientation of the image in the Image Viewer Screen. It also
lets you place an Internal or External Text Box in the image.
1. Place a check in the check box of the text box you want.
2. Select the button that orients the image as indicated in the table below.
Internal Text Box Prints a text box within the image area. You can select from
eight different positions on the image to position the text
box.
External Text Box Prints an external text box that falls outside the image area.
The external text box has two positions: the bottom or the
left side of the image.
External Position Moves the external text box from the bottom of the image to
the left side of the image.
Rotate 90 CW or 90 Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter-
CCW clockwise.
Flip Horizontal or Flip Flips the image horizontally or vertically.
Vertical
Save Changes Saves the changes to the database. Select when all
changes on the screen are finished.

The changes can be seen in the Image Viewer as you make them.

144
Radiographer's Software

The Key Operator can set the default flip and rotate characteristics for each View.

See also:
Positioning an Internal Text Box
Positioning an External Text Box
Rotating and Flipping the Image

145
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen


The Multi-format Configuration Screen lets you compare images by placing multiple images
on a single print. You can rotate or flip the images to optimize the comparison.
If you want to print the images in a multi-format print as True-size, you must select the True
Size radio button for each individual image before you create the multi-format print.
When selecting True-size in a multi-format print, the rotation of images is automatically oriented
in order to make the best use of the film.
To select a multi-format:
1. Select a 2-, 3-, or 4-up layout in crosswise or lengthwise format.

2. Select the section of the layout where you want the image to appear.
3. Select a thumbnail.
4. Select from the following:
Justification (right, left, center)
Image Internal Text Boxes, Image External Text Boxes, Page External Text Box
Flip Horizontal
Rotate 90 CW (Clockwise)

5. When images have been acquired, positioned, and oriented, select Print.
Any quadrants not used will print black.

146
Radiographer's Software

Multi-format images are only delivered to print destinations.


You can print multi-format images regardless of the printer type and film size.

See also:
Selecting a Destination
Creating Multi-format Prints

147
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Selecting a Destination
Select Destination lets you automatically deliver your images to specific printers or PACS
workstations. Select Destination is located on the Image Viewer Screen.
To select a destination:
Place a check mark next to the destination on the Select Destination Screen. The destination
may be a specific film size or type of image that requires a specific printer.
To select a different Destination Profile:
Select Change Destination Profile from the Patient Input Screen.
To print an image:
1. Select the thumbnail to display the image in the Image Viewer Screen.
2. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to all pre-defined destinations.

See also:
Using the Print Tab
Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen
Creating Multi-format Prints
Creating a True-size Print

148
Radiographer's Software

Selecting a Text Box


To select the appropriate Text Box, consider the type of image area that is displayed. You can
make the selection or the Key Operator can select a default Text Box for any given View.
Select the Internal Text Box when you want the information to appear within the image and
when you must be able to print to any printer. The Text Box can be moved to any corner or any
inside edge to avoid covering any anatomy.
Select the External Text Box when you want to position the label outside the image area. This
Text Box shrinks the image and affects True-size printing.
The Key Operator configures a Text Box to automatically fill in with data, such as Hospital
Name, Exposure Index, or View.

See also:
Positioning an Internal Text Box
Positioning an External Text Box

149
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Positioning an Internal Text Box


You can locate the Text Box in eight different locations, horizontally or vertically, in each corner
of the image on the Image Viewer Screen.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab .


2. Select the Internal Text Box check box.
3. Select the point on the image where you want to place the text box.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Select Save & Accept Image to send the image to the selected printers and workstations.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen

150
Radiographer's Software

Positioning an External Text Box

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Print Tab .


2. Select the External Text Box check box. The Text Box appears on the screen.
3. Select the External Position button to move the Text Box to the position you want.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Select Accept Image to send to selected printers and workstations.

See also:
Selecting a Text Box
Using the Image Viewer Screen

151
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Review
Creating a True-size Print
True-size produces the same size image you would get if you were using a film-screen system.
True-size always crops the print slightly. Use the crop box to determine what part of the image
will be printed.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab .
2. Select the True-size Print radio button.
3. Select the Crop Box Orientation arrows to locate the crop box on the area of the image to be
printed.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Select Accept Image to send the image to selected printers and workstations.
True-size printing delivers the image to the destination at 100% +/-2%. Because
variations exist in scanners and printers, use caution when using these images for exact
measurements. Use a known marker at the subject level when making the exposure and
calculating image magnification.
To support True-size printing, a printer must support DICOM Requested Image Size. See
the printers DICOM Conformance Statement to determine if a printer supports
Requested Image Size.

See also:
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Using the Print Tab
Printing an Image

152
Radiographer's Software

What Is Multi-format Printing?


Multi-format printing lets you combine 2, 3, or 4 images and print them on one page.
When you create a multi-format print:
Image aspect ratio is maintained.
Images from any cassette size can be placed together in a multi-format print.
Images are printed crosswise or lengthwise in 2- or 4-up layouts.
Images are printed with saved Image Processing parameters, markers, and orientation.
Multi-format images are only delivered to print destinations.

See also:
Creating Multi-format Prints
Selecting Multi-formats
Adding a Multi-format Print

153
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Best Fit to Print


Rotates the image 90 degrees.

Multi-Format Print Layout (Landscape)

Image Orientation on Viewer (Portrait)

Best Fit Shrink to Fit

154
Radiographer's Software

Creating Multi-format Prints


The Key Operator can automatically configure Multi-Format printing within the optional
Procedure Mapping function.

The Multi-format icon on the Image Viewer Screen indicates whether the image is
currently in a multi-format print. If it is not, the button appears as a blue rectangle. If an image is
in a multi-format print, then a multi-format icon appears.
Select the Multi-format icon to do one of the following:
Create a new multi-format print for this study.
Change an existing multi-format print.
Print a multi-format print.
The Multi-format Configuration Screen opens so that you can make additional changes to the
print if desired.
To set up a multi-format print:

1. Select the blue button next to the Save & Accept Image button.
2. Select the format for the multi-format print.
3. Select the image to place in the highlighted box.
4. Select True-size, if desired.
5. Select whether to deliver the individual images with the multi-format prints.
The image displays the Text Box and the True-size print outline if it was set up in multi-
format.
You do not need to have two or more images before accessing the multi-print screen.
To position a multi-format print:
1. Select an image to place it in the first empty square in the multi-format print.
2. To select a different location, select the location, then select the image.
The image is added to the print layout. The layout location is highlighted in yellow.
3. The thumbnail image frame turns green when selected.
4. Continue selecting images until the layout is complete.
You can include an image as many times as you like.
To remove an image, select the image and then select the trash can.
You can flip or rotate images after they have been included in a multi-format print.
5. Select Save Changes.
To change the orientation in a multi-format print, open the image in the Image Viewer Screen,
make and save the changes.

155
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

To print a multi-format print:


Select Print to print the multi-format image.
The image is sent to the displayed printer unless you change the destination using Select
Destination.
Any locations on the multi-format print that you leave blank will print black.
If the multi-format layout fails to print to the selected destination, an error message appears.
Select the Deliver button on the Image Viewer Screen to attempt to redeliver the image or
select a different destination (if applicable) and select the Deliver button.

See also:
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen
Selecting Multi-formats

156
Radiographer's Software

Selecting Multi-formats
If you have started a multi-format print and you change your mind, you can select a different
layout without starting over.
To select a different multi-format layout:
1. From the Multi-format Configuration Screen, select Delete Multi-format Print.
2. Select a new multi-format layout if desired.
3. Select the image and new location.
4. Select Save Changes.
Deleting a multi-format print
Deletes the current multi-format layout in the Multi-Format Configuration Screen.
Lets you select a new multi-format layout if desired.
Deletes only formatting. The images are not changed.

See also:
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen
Adding a Multi-format Print
Creating Multi-format Prints
What Is Multi-format Printing?

157
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Adding a Multi-format Print


From the Patient Input Screen, select Change Multi-format Configuration.
From the Image Viewer Screen, select the Multi-format icon.
See Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen for information about formatting the print.
You can access the Multi-format Configuration Screen from any screen where images can be
sent to destinations, such as the Patient Input Screen or Image Viewer Screen.

See also:
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen
Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen

158
Radiographer's Software

Searching Techniques

Finding an Image
There are at least two options for finding an image you cannot locate quickly. Both options begin
at the Main Menu.
1. At the Main Menu, select Study Data.
2. At the Patient Query Screen, select Find Locally.
3. Select the study from the Patient Work List.
4. Select the image.
or
At the Main Menu, select Image Review.
5. At the Image List Screen, filter the database for the patient's image.
6. Select a status (All, Unassigned, Delivered, etc.).
7. Select the image.

See also:
Searching for an Existing Patient
Improving Search Results
Using the Patient Query Screen
Using the Patient Work List Screen
Using the Image List Screen

159
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Identifying Work List Colors


The Work List is colorful in order to save you time as you view the list searching for patients. For
example, you can quickly assess the Arrived patients because they will all appear in green. The
standard colors have the following meanings.
Scheduled
Started
Arrived
Failed Update
Complete

All colors are subject to change by the Key Operator.

See also:
Finding an Image
Improving Search Results
Searching for an Existing Patient
Using the Patient Work List Screen

160
Radiographer's Software

Improving Search Results


Use the Patient Query Screen to locate studies. Enter search criteria to return a list of all
studies that meet those criteria.
For example: Enter the search criteria Today to return a list of all studies entered in the system
today to the Patient Work List Screen.
To perform a search:
1. If you do not enter any criteria, there is no filter and a list of all patients in the system will be
returned. Returning large volumes of data can cause system slowdowns. For best results, select
a narrow time window filter of YesterdayTomorrow.
2. Select Find Study Locally to search the CR or DR database.
3. Select Find Study Remotely to search the CR or DR database, and to query the HIS/RIS
immediately.
If no records match the criteria:
1. Check the criteria carefully for errors in spelling, accurate time window, correct patient ID, etc.
2. Select the Find Study Remotely button to query the HIS/RIS. Newly entered records from the
HIS/RIS may take a few minutes before they can be polled by the modality.
Select the New Patient button as a last resort to manually enter the patient information.
3. Select the New Patient button, which will take you to the Patient Input Screen to enter the
information.
If emergency patient information is not available or emergency circumstances do not allow the
time to enter data, immediately proceed to using the Trauma function.
How do I search for a patient?
1. On the Patient Query Screen, enter the information for the patient you wish to find in the
appropriate field. This is the search criteria. The more specific the data, the more likely you are
to retrieve the specific patient record you seek.
2. Select CR, DX, RT or ALL from the modality field. If you select ALL, patient records for all
modalities are returned.
3. Select a time range:
Today
Yesterday to Tomorrow
Past Week to Tomorrow
Unrestricted
The Unrestricted option means that time is not used as a selection criteria when searching
for a patient.
If more than one record matches information used in the query, the system presents a work
list of all matching records.

161
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

4. After entering the search criteria, select the Find Study Locally or Find Study Remotely
button if you want to retrieve the record from the HIS/RIS. Using the Find Study Locally will
only search the System's database.
Large returns of records can cause system slowdowns. For best results, narrow the search by
selecting a narrow time window such as Yesterday to Tomorrow.

How do I search for a patient whose study is completed?


1. Enter the search criteria for Study Status Completed.
2. Select the Find Study Locally button.
This function returns a list of patients that match the search criteria. If only a single record is
found, that record appears on the Patient Input Screen.
or
Enter the search criteria for a normal search.
3. Select Find Locally button.

Why can't I find a specific patient when I select Find Study Locally?
The record may not be on the local system.
The record may not be on the local system because the patient record may not have been
received by the system via the DICOM Work List.
Select Find Study Remotely to search and retrieve the patient record from the Work List
provider.
The search criteria may be incorrect or too limiting.
1. Review the criteria to make it less restrictive.
2. Select Find Study Locally again.
The system only finds patient records that satisfy all the search criteria specified.

Why don't I see a Work List when I select Find Study Remotely?
Select a different search criteria.
If the Find Study Remotely function does not return a Work List that includes the individual
patient you are searching for, it is usually because the search criteria is incorrect or too limiting.
Review the criteria or make it less restrictive and select Find Study Remotely again.
The Find Study Remotely operation may "time out" if the Work List provider is not
functioning properly. The Work List providing device is part of your sites HIS/RIS and is
normally supported by the IT group.
Contact the IT group for assistance if this problem occurs repeatedly.

See also:

162
Radiographer's Software

Identifying Work List Colors


Using the Patient Query Screen
Using the Patient List Screen
Searching for an Existing Patient
Using the Find Study Locally Button
Using the Find Study Remotely Button
Finding an Image

163
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Searching for an Existing Patient


What are the search criteria?
The Study Status field
Lets you select from the following study states:
Scheduled
Arrived
Started
Scheduled/Arrived/Started
Scheduled/Arrived
Completed
Failed Update
Cancelled
All

The Time field


Today
Today to Tomorrow
Yesterday to Tomorrow
Past Week to Tomorrow
Unrestricted

The Unrestricted option


Unrestricted means that time will not be used as a selection criterion when searching for a
patient.

The Modality field


CR
DX
RT
ALL
If you select ALL, patient records for all Modalities are returned.

164
Radiographer's Software

The Failed Update status


Failed Update Status lets you find patient records whose status has not been forwarded to the
PACS system due to equipment or network problems. Use this feature if the Scheduled
Workflow option is installed on the System.
After entering the search criteria, select the Find Study Locally or Find Study Remotely
button. Use the Find Study Remotely if you want to retrieve the record from the HIS/RIS.
(Using the Find Study Locally button only searches the System's local database).

See also:
Improving Search Results
Using the Patient Query Screen
Using the Patient Work List Screen
Finding an Image

165
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Patient Query Screen


Use the Patient Query Screen to locate studies. Enter search criteria to return a list of all
studies that meet those criteria.
For example, enter the search criteria Today to return a list of all today's studies to the Patient
Work List Screen.

If emergency patient information is not available or emergency circumstances do not allow the
time to enter data, immediately proceed to using the Trauma function.

See also:
Finding an Image
Improving Search Results
Searching for an Existing Patient
Using the Patient Work List Screen
Using the Image List Screen

166
Radiographer's Software

Using the Patient Work List Screen


The Patient Work List Screen provides a listing of studies by status from the combined local
and remote databases.
To find a study quickly:
1. Set up a query from the Patient Query Screen.
2. Select Find Study Locally.
3. Select a study from the Work List.
The Patient Input Screen opens with that patient and study.
The studies are listed on the Patient Work List Screen according to the filters from the Patient
Query Screen. They are sorted based on a setting from the Key Operator. You can resort the
list by selecting one of the headers on the screen.

See also:
Improving Search Results

167
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Image List Screen


The Image List screen allows you to locate images quickly by applying filters to sort the images
on the local database.
How to search with the Image List Screen:
1. Enter patient information at the top of the screen by bar coding or enter manually using the
keyboard.
2. Search the resulting list by patient data such as Patient's Name, Patient ID, Accession
Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date. These filters are located across the top of the list
window.
3. Select a filter to search by image status:
All Studies
This filter generates links to all non-delivered studies with the criteria you entered, such as
Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date.

Need Approval
This filter generates links to all images that have not been accepted.

Unassigned Images
This filter generates links to all images that do not have a patient assigned to them. This filter
is linked to the Images Not Assigned button that appears on the Main Menu.

Failed Delivery
This filter generates links to all images that have been accepted and sent to destinations, but
failed. You can access this group from a button on the Main Menu Screen at any time.

Pending Delivery
This filter generates links to all studies that have been accepted and sent but the CR/DR has
not heard back from the destination-delivery is in progress.

Need Destination
This filter generates links to all studies that have been accepted but not assigned a
destination.

Delivered Images
All images that have been delivered to printers and workstations. A delivered image cannot
be changed or reprocessed unless a copy of the image is made.

168
Radiographer's Software

See also:
Improving Search Results
Finding an Image

169
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Views

Defining a View
A View is a pre-set image type that a radiographer can select to represent an exam. It consists
of position, projection, and image processing preferences. It is the basic element in the CR or
DR image chain.
Views are associated with procedures on the Patient Input Screen with the optional Procedure
Mapping.
When the Key Operator creates a view, it appears on the Patient Input Screen.

See also:
Adding a View
Deleting a View
Changing the View Name

170
Radiographer's Software

Adding a View
You can choose from three procedure workflows to add Views to a study. You can add as many
Views as you like.
Setting Up Views for Procedures
In most instances, the View selection is complete once the procedure is selected.

To add additional Views to the procedure:


1. Select Add View.
2. Select the Primary Category.
3. Select the Secondary Category.
4. Select all of the desired Views for the study.
5. Select Save Changes.
An image of a cassette represents the image until it is scanned. Some facilities use a "tutor"
image representing the View to provide a reference for the radiographer. When you scan an
image, the reference image changes to a thumbnail of the actual image.
Displaying Image Icons

See also:
Defining a View
Using the Patient Input Screen
Add View Button
Deleting a View
Changing the View Name
Setting Up Views for Procedures

171
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Deleting a View
1. Select the tutor image.
A yellow highlight appears around the icon to indicate this image has been selected.
2. Select the Delete View button on the bottom of the screen.
An image that has been acquired cannot be deleted from the Patient Input Screen.

See also:
Using the Patient Input Screen
Defining a View
Adding a View
Changing the View Name

172
Radiographer's Software

Changing the View Name


Before image acquisition, you can change the view name on the Patient Input Screen.
1. Select the image with the View Name to change.
2. Select the View Name field.
3. Select a View from a different category by selecting the primary or secondary keyboard tabs on
the View keyboard.

After the image is acquired, you can change the View Name on the Image Viewer Screen.

1. At the Image Viewer Screen, select the Image Processing Options Editor Tab .
2. Select the View Name field.
3. Select a region from the Primary Category.
4. Select a body part from the Secondary Category.
5. Select a View.
6. Select Save Changes.
Categories
Primary Select an
Category anatomical region.
Secondary Select a body part.
Category
Views Select a view.

While the image has a new View Name, it retains the image processing of the former View
Name. Select Reprocess to process the image with the new name.
Reprocess the View Name if it is an incorrect match for the image. Do not reprocess if the
image processing is satisfactory.
When you select a view, the Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast settings are
determined automatically and applied for you if reprocessing an existing image.

See also:
Defining a View
Using the Patient Input Screen
Using the Image Viewer Screen
Reprocessing the Image

173
Capture Link System
Basic information

Joining Devices
To join a Console to the Capture Link System:
1. Deliver all undelivered images that were scanned in Standalone mode.
2. At the Capture Link Configuration Screen, enter the IP address of the Capture Link Server.
3. Select Connect to a Capture Link Server.
4. Select Save Changes and reboot.
5. When you get the message "Do you want to connect?" select Yes.
Once a machine joins the Capture Link System, it is no longer in Standalone mode. Patient and
exam data created in Standalone mode and images captured on the machine in Standalone
mode are not accessible in Capture Link mode (although they all remain on the hard drive).
Make sure to deliver all images captured in Standalone mode before joining to the Capture Link
System. When joining to the Capture Link System, a message reminds you to deliver all
images.

See also:
Introducing the Capture Link System
Capture Link System Workflow
Capture Link System Range of Operation
Identifying Active Devices
Identifying Icons
Standalone Mode

175
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Capture Link System Workflow


In a Capture Link System, all patient records and all patient images from any device joined to
the Capture Link System are available for review and use on any device joined to the Capture
Link System.
When thumbnail images are displayed, the name of the machine of origin appears in the border
of the image after it leaves the Capture Link System. The name appears on the Image List at
the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link System.
An example of a Capture Link System workflow:
1. Start a study that includes multiple cassettes or exams.
2. Initiate the study at any Console or Remote Operations Panel (ROP).
3. Perform any of the following activities at any Console or ROP:
Edit Patient/Exam data.
Read the cassette bar-code.
Scan CR cassettes at any CR Console.
Review images, adjust Image Processing, add markers.
Add views or exams.
Images are grouped, stored, and labeled for all destinations.

See also:
Capture Link System Range of Operation
Identifying Active Devices
Identifying Icons
Introducing the Capture Link System

176
Capture Link System

Capture Link System Range of Operation


Application of Configuration Attributes to DIRECTVIEW Capture Link CR Systems
When setting system configurations for a machine that is part of a Capture Link group the extent
of use for these parameters varies. The levels of use (scope) are:
All CR Systems on the Capture Link System
All CR Systems of the Same Model on the Capture Link System
Unique for each CR System
Unique for each system on the Capture Link System, CRs, Remote Operating Panels (ROP)
and Remote Access Software (RAS)
For ROP and RAS applications, their configuration is derived from the CR to which they are
attached.
Every configurable item in the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System is assigned a scoping level,
or range of use. This level determines if changing an item at one device will cause the same
change at a different device within a Capture Link environment.
There are 5 different levels of scoping:
These configuration items
are identical on every
machine that is a member of
the Capture Link System:
The Capture Link Server,
Universal
the CR/DR consoles, and
View All (except ROP/RAS devices.
Configuration fields that are
configured
from the Example: The HIS/RIS
Image Server information is the
Processing same for every machine.
Preference
Editor)
Procedure All Fields
Mapping
Configuration
Profile All Fields
Configuration
List All Fields
Configuration
Reject All Fields
Reasons
Layout Marker
Configuration Editors
Trauma All Fields

177
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Defaults
Display Patient Query
Configuration Tab
Patient Input
Tab (Including
Auto Populate
Tech ID)
Patient Link
Tab
Other Tab
(Except key
clicks and
volume)
Bar-Code All except
Configuration Device Type
& Com Port
Delivery Remove Print
Preferences from 1-up on
MF Print
Upper Case
on Delivery
Translate
Body Part and
Projection
HIS/RIS All Fields
Polling and
Remote Query
Regional All Fields
Configuration
Customizable All Fields
Field
Descriptions
Long-Length Auto update
Configuration sub-images to
s delivered
System All
Maintenance
Configurable Marker
Text Boxes Transparency
Remote All Fields
Device
Configuration
Security All User

178
Capture Link System

Administrator Configuration
s
Security All Security
Administrator Configuration
s
Security All Roles
Administrator Configuration
s

Single Device Only These configuration items


can be different for
Display Other> Key everything, even ROP &
Configuration Clicks and RAS devices.
Volume
Example: Key click volume
Bar Code Device Type might need to be louder for
Configuration and COM a ROP that is in a loud
Port room, but quiet in a different
room.
Long-Length SID Values
Configuration
s
Network All Fields
Settings

Single Machine Only These configuration items


can be different for every
Image All Fields CR/DR device in a cluster.
Processing
Preference
ROP/RAS devices will use
Editor the configuration of the
machine that they are
Required All Fields currently connected to.
Fields
Layout Patient Input
Configuration Example: Preventative
Layout
Maintenance reminders are
Remote machine-based because the
Patient Data last service time for each
Entry System machine can be different.
Delivery Hospital
Preferences Name and
Address
Operating
Mode
Long-Length QA Mode for
Configuration Long-Length
Imaging
SID Values

179
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Configurable Text Box


Text Boxes Layout
Text Box
Transparency
Security All Fields
Configuration
Preventative All Fields
Maintenance
Configuration
MIM All Fields
Destinations

Same Product Family When using CR/DR


integration on a Capture
Layout Image Link System &endash;
Configuratio Viewer
n
These configuration items
Editors are the same within a
Patient Product Family (all CR
Names devices, all DR devices, or
the Capture Link Server
Color All Fields within the same family) but
Preferences can be different for different
Delivery Delivery Product Families.
Preferences Mode ROP/RAS devices will use
Upper Case the configuration of the
on Delivery machine that they are
currently connected to.
Translate
Body Part
and Example: You may want to
Projection use CR IOD on CR devices,
but DX IOD for DR devices.
Same Machine Model These configuration items
are the same for every
Layout Image Viewer device that has the same
Configuration Editors model name (CR 850, CR
950, DR 7500) in the
Capture Link System.
ROP/RAS devices will use
the configuration of the
machine that they are
currently connected to.
Example: The tabs
displayed on the Image
Viewer Screen may vary
within different applications
based on the capabilities of

180
Capture Link System

that specific model.

181
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Identifying Active Devices in the Capture Link System


The Status of the Capture Link System is seen in Utilities in Capture Link Server Status.
Select Ping Devices.
The name of each machine in the Capture Link System is listed.
The active devices appear with a green dot to indicate good communication or a red dot to
indicate a communications problem.

See also:
Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen
Using the Capture Link Server
Troubleshooting the Capture Link System

182
Capture Link System

Identifying Icons
Once you configure a Console for the Capture Link System and communicate with the Server, a
Capture Link icon appears in the upper right corner of the title bar on the Console or device
screen. When communication is active and intact, the icon is green.
If the network becomes disconnected from the device and is unable to automatically reconnect
within 10 minutes, the icon turns red.
When you see this It means What you should do
icon
Always shown on Capture Use the Capture Link
Link Server or Mini-Capture System.
Link Server.

Able to communicate with Remain in Standalone


the Capture Link Server, but Mode until the icon
the Capture Link Server is changes showing that
down. you can communicate
with the Capture Link
Server. Deliver all
images and finish
working on the current
exam before rejoining
the Capture Link
System.
Able to communicate with Use the Capture Link
the Capture Link Server and System.
the Capture Link Server is up
and running.
Not able to communicate You are not connected
with the Capture Link Server to the Capture Link
and the Capture Link Server Server. The Server is
is down. down. Do not reconnect.
Not able to communicate You are not connected
with the Capture Link Server, to the Capture Link
but the Capture Link Server Server. The Server is
is up and running. running but you cannot
reconnect.
What do I do if the Capture Link icon turns red?
1. When the light turns red, allow five minutes for the communications problem to clear.
2. Reset the Capture Link System connection by restarting in Standalone mode and reconnecting.
What if I see a red icon on the first attempt to connect?
1. Check to see if the server IP address is typed correctly.

183
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

2. Check to see if the server is accessible on the network.

See also:
Rejoining the Capture Link System
Removing a Console from the Capture Link System

184
Capture Link System

Using the Capture Link System


How does the Capture Link System work?
The KODAK DIRECTVIEW Capture Link System automatically finds the correct patient data, no
matter where the image is acquired. You can link multiple devices to the system. Once linked,
the various devices share patient and exam data from a single database on the Capture Link
Server.
You can enter all patient and exam data at the various consoles and external devices, and it is
immediately available for use at each device on the Capture Link System. All images in the
System may be viewed at any device in the System, although the actual image file remains on
the CR or DR system that produced it.
After beginning an exam, you can perform the following functions from any point on the network:
Add a View
Edit patient and exam information
Review images
Approve images
Check for quality
Manipulate images
Reject images
Deliver to destinations
What can I link to a Capture Link System?
You can link up to five CR or DR Consoles and up to 20 external devices (such as an ROP or
RPDES) to a Capture Link System at one time.
Remote Operations Panels (ROPs) communicate with all CR Consoles in the Capture Link
System.
Remote Data Entry Stations, RIG/RDET or a combination of these communicate with the all CR
Consoles in the Capture Link System.
You can connect up to 5 System Consoles.
What happens if I am not connected to the Capture Link System?
When the CR Console is configured for the Capture Link System but not connected to a
Capture Link System, it is in Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone
mode. Standalone mode lets you continue using the CR System if access to the Capture Link
Server is disrupted.
What systems are compatible with a Capture Link System?
KODAK CR Systems that are running KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.1 and
higher, including:
o KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic and Elite CR Systems
o KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR 825/850/975 Systems
o KODAK DIRECTVIEW 19-inch Remote Operations Panel

185
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

o KODAK DIRECTVIEW Remote Patient Data Entry Software Version 5.1 or higher
o KODAK RIG/RDET Software for KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR 800/900 Series
o A HIS/RIS System that supports the DICOM Modality Work List
KODAK DR Systems that are running KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.0 and
higher.

See also:
Joining Devices
Capture Link System Workflow
Capture Link System Range of Operation
Identifying Icons
Standalone Mode

186
Capture Link System

Standalone Mode
When the Console is configured for the Capture Link System, but is not yet connected, it is in
Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. Standalone mode lets
you continue using your System if Network problems or other causes disable access to the
Capture Link Server.
Standalone mode is useful for correcting error conditions, such as communication errors that
display the red icon.
When should I enter Standalone mode?
Enter Standalone mode whenever it is necessary to operate the System and the Capture Link
network is unavailable.
If the network to which the System is connected becomes unavailable, it will be possible to
enter patients and scan images, but it will not be possible to deliver images to destinations.
Enter Standalone mode to intentionally remove your machine from the Capture Link network.
To enter Standalone mode:
1. Select Shutdown.
2. Deselect Join Capture Link Server after Restart.
3. Select Reboot and OK.

See also:
Introducing the Capture Link System
Identifying Devices
Capture Link System Workflow
Capture Link System Range of Operation

187
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Basic Capture Link System Operations

Changing Image Processing in the Capture Link System


How can the Key Operator make Global Changes to default Image Processing values?
The Key Operator has the same ability to change IP configurations in Capture Link mode as in
Standalone mode. See How to Configure a View.
For example, the Key Operator can use the Image Processing Preference Editor to change
all of the images in an image Category or the images in a specific View. These changes
become the defaults for the CR device in the Capture Link System. When you leave the Capture
Link System, make sure to restore the parameters to the individual Systems. See Capture Link
System Range of Operation.
Use a Console in the Capture Link System to configure image processing preferences across
the Capture Link System.
Back up parameters and restore them to each local machine to ensure proper behavior when
working off-line.
1. The Key Operator logs in.
2. From the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration, then select
Image Processing Preferences.
3. Select a Category (primary or secondary) or specific View to adjust.
What routine changes can the technologist make to the Image Processing for each view?
You can apply the following Image Processing settings and features to any image at any
Console or CR ROP such as:
A Look (if EVP Plus is enabled)
Brightness, latitude, and detail contrast
Noise Suppression
What happens to my Image Processing Values when I join and leave the Capture Link
System?
While you are joined to the Capture Link System, the Image Processing Preference
configurations are specific to each CR device.
When in Standalone mode, each machine uses the Image Processing parameters that were
stored on the local machine.
How can I make sure the Image Processing parameters in Standalone mode are the same
as those used with the Capture Link System?
Each machine uses its own locally saved configuration settings when it operates in Standalone
mode. Back up the configuration settings from the Capture Link server and restore them to each
individual machine to insure they are identical. Make sure to repeat this process whenever the
settings change in the Capture Link System.

See also:

Backup and Restore

188
Capture Link System

Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone Machine


Adjusting Image Parameters Menu
Using the Capture Link System
What Is Standalone Mode?
Configuring Destination Profiles
Identifying Active Devices
Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List

189
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link


System
You can set destination profiles so that images acquired on a certain CR or DR system will
always be delivered to a certain destination. There is one set of profiles for the entire Capture
Link System. You can add as many as you like for different filter conditions.
Profiles in the Capture Link System can include the Modality name, where profiles in
Standalone mode do not.
Does configuring the destination profile make all the machines in the Capture Link
System deliver to the same destination?
Yes, if the images meet the profile filter criteria.
For example, if you set up a profile so that cassette size 18 x 24 prints to printer ABC, all
cassettes of size 18 x 24 that are scanned anywhere on the Capture Link System will be printed
to printer ABC.
If this is not what you want, then you can create a machine profile:
1. Go to the Key Operator Functions, System Configuration, and select the Destination
Profiles Configuration Screen.
2. Create a profile that specifies a destination and a machine name filter such as:
Profile Filters Result
Machine A images print to All images scanned on Machine A print to printer
printer XYZ XYZ
Machine B images print to All images scanned on Machine B print to printer
printer ABC ABC

With this profile set, any images scanned on Machine B will not go to printer XYZ.
Does setting up a new profile override the others in the Capture Link System?
The Capture Link Server selects the profile with the highest priority set by the user. Each image
is distributed in accordance with the first profile it matches. The profiles are listed by priority on
the interface. You can change the priority by moving profiles up and down the list.
The Default Destination Profile will always appear at the bottom of the Destination Profile Name
list.
For example:
The first profile: 18 x 24 Machine A images print to printer XYZ.
The second profile: 24 x 30 images print to printer ABC.
If an 18 x 24 cassette is scanned on Machine A, the first profile is selected, and it delivers to
printer XYZ.
If a 24 x 30 cassette is scanned on Machine A, the first profile does not match, so the software
moves to the next, and the image is delivered to printer ABC.

190
Capture Link System

Destination Profiles are included in the configuration settings that may differ between Capture
Link mode and Standalone mode. To duplicate the settings between modes, back them up from
the Capture Link server and restore them to each machine in Standalone mode.

See also:
Using the Capture Link System

191
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Communicating with the HIS/RIS


The Capture Link server connects the Capture Link System to the HIS/RIS. Information from the
HIS/RIS is available to all Consoles and ROPs on the Capture Link System.
Patient and exam queries from any Console or ROP are directed to the Capture Link Server and
then to the HIS/RIS as necessary. Information returned from the Query is stored on the Server
and is available to all other Consoles and ROPs.
The Capture Link Server polls the Work List for new data.
For best overall performance, configure exact queries of the DICOM Work List (queries by
patient name, patient ID, or accession number) whenever possible.

See also:
Entering Data with the Capture Link System
Image Review with the Capture Link System
Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System

192
Capture Link System

Entering Data in the Capture Link System


Enter data the same way you would on a local CR or DR System. You can see the data you
enter at every Console and ROP on the system.
When you select Find Study Locally on the Patient Query Screen, the system searches the
Capture Link Database to locate the patient record.
How does the Patient Input Screen change when I connect to the Capture Link System?
In a Capture Link System, all patients and all images from anywhere on the System are
available for review and use anywhere on the system.
The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the
Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name
appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture
Link.

See also:
Using the Patient Work List Screen
Using the Patient Query Screen

193
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Review with the Capture Link System


You can review all images for an exam at any Console or ROP regardless of where they were
acquired.
1. Make sure that the Key Operator has enabled the Console with the Capture Link System option
and connected the System to the Capture Link System.
2. Acquire a single patient exam from any CR/DR systems within the Capture Link System.
3. Query the patient, and select the patient from the Patient Work List Screen.
All thumbnail images display properly, regardless of where they were acquired. The name of
the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the Image List
until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name appears on
the Image list at the Capture Link server and any modality joined to the Capture Link
System.
Although the view of the image is shared, the actual image file resides in the local database on
the hard drive local database of the CR or DR Console where it was acquired.
What should I do if I can't see the image?
If the System cannot connect with the machine that has the image file (the machine is down or
network issues prevent a connection), an icon indicates that the image is inaccessible. Make
sure that the machine with the image file is available on the network. Make sure that the
Capture Link server is available on the network.
How can I tell which machine has the image?
The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the
Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. Then the name appears on
the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture Link System.
How long does it take to retrieve the images with Capture Link?
Depending on network performance, the image retrieval time may be slower than retrieving an
image from Standalone mode.

See also:
Using the Capture Link System
Changing Image Processing

194
Capture Link System

Multi-format Printing with the Capture Link System


You can create a multi-format print for an exam where the images have been acquired from
multiple Systems.
1. Make sure that the Key Operator has enabled the Console with the Capture Link System option
and connected the System to the Capture Link System.
2. Acquire a single patient exam on different CR/DR systems within the Capture Link System.
3. Query the patient, and select from the Patient Work List screen the patient that has images
acquired on multiple CR/DR systems.
All thumbnail images are displayed properly (images retrieved from the different systems
from where they were acquired). Each thumbnail indicates where the image is located.
4. Select the Multi-format Print icon.
5. At the Multi-format Configuration Screen, add images from multiple Systems to create a
multi-format print.
How long does it take to print a multi-format print from the Capture Link System?
It only takes a few seconds; not much longer than printing from Standalone mode.
Why can't I see the image?
If the System cannot reach the machine where the image was acquired (machine down or
network issues), an icon indicates that the image cannot be viewed.
When you attempt to deliver the print, a delivery error appears if the image cannot be retrieved
from the remote machine.

See also:
Using the Capture Link System

195
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link


System
CR Systems and DR Systems behave differently when processing LLI on the Capture Link
System. See the DR Capture Link Online Help for more information about working with DR LLI.
You can scan multiple CR Cassettes on multiple systems to reduce scanning time, and process
the individual cassettes by stitching them together automatically. This workflow reduces the time
to stitch the Long-Length image for review and delivery.
Make sure that the Key Operator enables the Capture Link System option at the CR Systems.
1. Scan the cassette bar-codes.
2. Perform the exam.
3. Scan the cassettes on one or more machines in the Capture Link System.
When the last image is acquired, stitching occurs at the machine where the first long-length
cassette in the study was scanned. The image is stitched as soon as the last image is scanned,
and is available for review at any Console or ROP on the Capture Link System.
How long does it take to create a stitched image with Capture Link?
Stitching starts as soon as the last cassette is scanned. For best workflow, scan all cassettes in
parallel on various machines.

See also:
Introducing the Capture Link System

196
Capture Link System

Capture Link System Communications

Image Recovery on the Capture Link System


When the Modality is configured for the Capture Link System but is not yet joined, it is in
Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. You can operate a
Modality in Standalone mode if the Capture Link Server becomes unavailable and the
individual Modality remains joined.
If the Modality is no longer joined to the Capture Link Server, you do not lose access to the
images that are located on the hard drive of each Console. However, the link between the
image and its patient/exam data is broken, and must be restored before the image can be
reviewed or delivered.
To restore the link between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has
switched to Standalone mode:
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities and Image Recovery.
The following data appears in a row for each image:
Accession Number
Patient ID
Acquisition Date and Time
View Name
2. Select the row(s) that represent the images you are looking for.
3. Select Recover Checked Images.
The Modality attempts to associate the image to a patient/exam.
If the Modality cannot automatically associate the image to a patient/exam, the image will be
unassigned.
See Assigning an Image
For unassigned images,
1. Re-create the patient/exam image record (Query the local or remote Work List or enter data
manually at the Patient Input Screen).
2. Assign the image to the patient and exam.
3. The data listed above appears in a row for each image.
To restore the association between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine
has returned to Capture Link Mode select Main Menu > Utilities:
See:Image Recovery to Capture Link
1. Use the filters to select the images in the system: All Studies, Need Approval, Unassigned
Images, Failed Delivery, Pending Delivery, Need Destination, or Delivered Images.
You can sort by Patient Last Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition
Date.

197
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, an image on your
system will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image Recovery to Capture Link
utility.
The recovered image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if there is no
match of the Accession Number and Patient ID.
2. Select the image.
3. Selecta patient record from the RIS or create one manually.
4. Assign the image.

See also:
Rejoining the Capture Link System
Re-delivering an Image
Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List

198
Capture Link System

Rejoining the Capture Link System


If you left the Capture Link System and wish to rejoin:
1. Select the Quick menu in the lower left corner of the screen.
2. Select Shutdown.
3. Select Join Capture Link Server after Restart.
4. Select Reboot.
The system will restart and reconnect to the Capture Link Server.

See also:
Image Recovery on the Capture Link System

199
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Redelivering an Image
When a machine joins the Capture Link System, it cannot access the patient records that were
previously captured while in Standalone mode. To avoid this, deliver all images acquired in
Standalone mode before connecting to the Capture Link System. A message reminds you to do
this before you connect.
If a Standalone mode image must be redelivered after reconnection to the Capture Link
System, two methods are available.
Method 1Redeliver in Standalone Mode
1. Return the machine to Standalone mode.
2. Select the image(s) from the Image Review list.
3. Redeliver as needed.
Method 2Image Restoration in Capture Link Mode
1. At the Main Menu, select Utilities.
2. Select Image Recovery to Capture Link.
3. Select the row that represents the image you are looking for.
4. Select the image to recover. The image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if
there is no match of the Accession Number and Patient ID.
5. Recreate a patient exam record for the image. (You may do this with a Query to the local or
remote Work List or a manual entry at the Patient Input screen.)
6. Assign the image to the patient and exam.
7. Review the now-assigned image and proceed in the usual manner.
The following data appears in a row for each image stored on the machines hard drive:
Accession Number
Patient ID
Acquisition Date and Time
View Name
Cassette ID (CR only)
What happens in Image Recovery?
If you acquired an image while in Capture Link mode, and now operate in Standalone mode (or
acquired the image in Standalone mode and are now in Capture Link mode), you are no
longer connected to the CR/DR System that owns the image. Image Recovery lets you access
the image on the hard drive of the machine that scanned the image.

See also:
Image Recovery on the Capture Link System

200
Capture Link System

Using Image Recovery to Capture Link


Use the following filters to select the images in the system:
o All Studies (all that need to be completed)
o Need Approval (studies that are not accepted)
o Unassigned Images (images not assigned to a patient)
o Failed Delivery (images that were not delivered)
o Pending Delivery
o Need Destination (no destination defined)
o Delivered Images (all images that have been delivered)
You can sort by Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date.
If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, images acquired while
not part of the Capture Link System will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image
Recovery to Capture Link Utility.
If a study exists with the same Patient ID and Accession number, it associates the image with
that study. If not, the image is an unassigned image, and the Patient ID and Accession number
are placed in the Image Comments field.

See also:
How do I assign an image?
Using the Capture Link System

201
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Capture Link Configuration


Capture Link

Making Preference Editor Changes in the Capture Link


System
When using the Capture Link System, you may want to change Preference Editor settings
while the Modality is joined to the Capture Link Server. The Preference Editor settings for each
Modality are recorded by the Server when they are joined.
If Image Processing Preference changes were made at the CR 975A in the example below, the
changes would be seen there, but the changes would actually exist on the Server. The Server
records each Modality's Preference Editor separately. The CR 975B does not see the
Preference Editor changes made on the CR 975A. Any images processed on the CR 975B will
be processed with the original Preference Editor settings.
To transfer the settings from CR 975A to CR

975B:
1. Back up the optional Procedure Mapping and Views component at the CR 975A.
2. Restore the Procedure Mapping settings and Views component at the CR 975 B.
The Server records the new CR 975B Preference Editor settings.
Restore the optional Procedure Mapping settings and Views from the back up and use the
Local Database Only check box to transfer the Preference Editor settings onto each Modality
for when the CR is in Standalone Mode. You can do this while still joined to the Server.

202
Capture Link System

See also:
Backup and Restore Configurations

203
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Capture Link Configuration Screen


The Capture Link Configuration Screen lets you do the following by selecting a radio button on
the screen:
Disconnect from a Capture Link Server
Connect to a Capture Link Server
Become a Capture Link Mini Custer Server

A Capture Link Mini Cluster Server is a Capture Link System consisting of two modalities, where
one of the modalities acts as a Server.

See also:
Joining Devices
Capture Link System Workflow
Using the Capture Link System

204
Capture Link System

Configuring and Connecting a Console or Accessory Device


1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Capture Link Configuration.
2. To configure the Console to connect to the Capture Link System, select Connect to a Capture
Link Server.
3. Enter the IP address of the Capture Link Server.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. At the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of the screen, select Shutdown.
6. Check Join the Capture Link System after rebooting.
7. Select Reboot.
Capture Link Icons in the application title bar show that the Capture Link System is
configured, but the machine is not connected. This is Standalone mode.
The application restarts and is connected to the Capture Link System. The Capture Link
Icons in the application title bar turn green to show that the device is connected to the
Capture Link System.
The Capture Link Server Status Screen updates to include a new identifying data row for
the machine you added.
To view the Capture Link Server Status Screen, from the Main Menu, select Utilities.
To configure the Console to disconnect from the Capture Link System, select Disconnect from
a Capture Link Server.

See also:
Capture Link System Requirements
Removing a Console from the Capture Link System

205
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Capture Link System Requirements


All machines that are linked to a Capture Link System must meet the following requirements:
Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Software Version 5.1 or higher in all CR Systems.
Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW DR Software Version 5.0 or higher in all DR Systems.
Install KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.2 or higher in all systems if joining CR
and DR Systems.
Connect Computed Radiography (CR) and Digital Radiography (DR) Systems via a Local
Area Network (LAN).
No common software options are required. A Console can join the Capture Link System at any
time.
Machines that run in Standalone mode, adjacent to a Capture Link System, do not have to meet
these requirements.

See also:
Backup and Restore

206
Capture Link System

Restoring Configurations from the Server to a Standalone


Machine
The Key Operator can back up the configurations from the Capture Link System and restore
them to a CR or DR System for when the machine is in Standalone mode. The machine in
Standalone mode will be configured identically to the Capture Link System.
1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Backup Restore.
2. Select the Backup/Restore Directory to select a drive to save the Backup to.
3. Select the Select button.
4. Select the items you would like to back up.
5. Select the Backup button.
6. Select Local Database Only and select Restore to save the configurations from the Capture
Link System to the local machine.
The selected Capture Link System configurations are now available to the machine when it
is in Standalone mode.
What configurations are restored?
Capture Link System Range of Operation

See also:
What Is Standalone Mode?

207
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Removing a Console from the Capture Link System


To remove a CR or DR Console from the Capture Link System:
1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Capture Link Network Configuration.
2. Select Disconnect.
The system auto-restarts and resumes operation in Standalone mode.

208
Capture Link System

Troubleshooting the Capture Link System


Why can't I enter an IP address in the Capture Link Configuration Screen?
Capture Link is an option that must be purchased and enabled on the Option Registration
Screen. If the option is not enabled, you will not be able to enter an IP address or change the
mode to connect to a Capture Link Server.
Why can't I see my images now that I am connected to the Capture Link System?
The images you seek were captured when you were in Standalone mode. Images that were
captured in Standalone mode are unavailable when you are connected to the Capture Link
System. If the Capture Link System cannot connect with the machine that has the image file
(the machine is down or network issues prevent a connection), an icon indicates that the image
cannot be viewed, and you will need to check for communication issues.
The System checks to see if there are any non-delivered images the local system when you
attempt to connect to the Capture Link System, but you must deliver them before you join or
those images will not be accessible until you leave Capture Link.
See Image Recovery.
Identifying the Capture Link Icons
The Capture Link Icons may indicate action on your part, or simply a status.
See Identifying Icons.
How can I tell which machine has the image?
The name of the system where the image resides does not appear on the thumbnail of the
Image List until after the Modality leaves the Capture Link System. At that time the name
appears on the Image List at the Capture Link Server and any Modality joined to the Capture
Link.

What happens if the Capture Link Server is unavailable on the hospital network?
If your system is configured for and connected to Capture Link and you encounter data network
problems, you can switch to Standalone mode.
The system will repeatedly attempt to overcome the network problems unless you switch to
Standalone mode. Choose an action:
Go into Standalone mode and run independently.
Do not restart in Standalone mode. Wait for the network problems to be resolved, and then
reconnect to the Server.

209
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Capture Link Server Help

Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory


EMC
Europe
EN 55022:1998+A1:2000 (Class B) Emissions
EN 55022:1998+A1:2000 (Class B) Immunity
EN 61000-3-2:2000 Harmonics
EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001 Flicker
U.S. and Canada
CFR 47 part 15 sub B (Class B) Emissions
Safety
Standards for Safety of Information Technology Equipment
UL 60950
EN 60950:2000
IEC 60950:1999

210
Capture Link System

Logging On to the Capture Link Server


Log on to the Capture Link server the same way you would log in to any Console running
KODAK DIRECTVIEW System Software Version 5.1 or higher.

See also:
Capture Link Server Safety and Regulatory
Using the Capture Link Server

211
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen


The Capture Link Server Status Screen quickly lists what machines are connected to the
Capture Link System, or what the network communication statuses of those systems are. To
access it, from the Main Menu, select Utilities.
To determine which devices are in the Capture Link System:
View the Capture Link Server Status Screen list of the names and IP address of each
machine Console and server configured for the Capture Link System. Remote Operations
Panels and other external devices are not listed.
To determine whether there is a Capture Link connectivity problem:
Select Ping Devices.
o If there is a good connection, the light appears green.
o If there is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.
To determine which types of connections you can check:
Network
Application
Database

212
Capture Link System

Capture Link System

Using the Capture Link Server


Log into the Capture Link Server the same way you would log onto a Console. The appearance
of the Server Software is similar to an ROP. If the System cannot connect with the machine that
has the image file (the machine is down, or network issues prevent a connection) an icon
appears that indicates the image cannot be viewed.
What can I use the Capture Link Server for?
Besides providing a master database for CR and DR Systems, you can:
You can use the Capture Link Server as another very-capable ROP to review and manage
images and patients.
Use the Capture Link Server for patient and image review.
Query images and patients.
Perform QA functions.
Create and update patient information.
How fast is the Server response for viewing patient and image data?
The performance time of image display should be similar to that of an ROP.

See also:
How to Use the Capture Link Server Status Screen
How to Recover Images from Capture Link
How do I enter data in Capture Link?
How do I connect?

213
Key Operator Functions
Key Operator Functions Menu
Select a blue link below for information about the Key Operator Functions.
How to Protect or Delete Exam Records
Technologist Statistics
Destination Summary Statistics
Rejected Image List
Download Statistics
Cassette Statistics
Erase Cycles
Monitor Configuration Introduction
System Configuration
Flagged Image List
Capture Link Configuration
Register and Activate Options
Backup and Restore
Total Quality Tool
CSA Log Viewer

215
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Backup and Restore


Backup and Restore Configurations
The Backup and Restore feature provides a mechanism to save and preserve a machines
configuration settings. You can restore the machine to a prior state following installation of new
software or recover from accidental changes in settings. Additionally the Backup and Restore
feature is a convenient method of transferring selected configuration information between
systems in a department.
Because of the unique attributes of different DIRECTVIEW systems, there are some limitations
to which configuration information can be transferred between machines. The software
automatically restricts the restoration of the configurable items as described in Transferring
configuration information to different machines.
Because of the unique attributes of different DIRECTVIEW systems, there are some limitations
to which configuration information can be transferred between machines. The software
automatically restricts the restoration of the configurable items as described in Transferring
Configuration Information. The description identifies the conditions under which selected
items can be transferred between machines.
Machine to Machine Settings are restored only to the
same machine from which they were
Bar-Code Device Type backed up.
Configuration & Com Port
Select the link to view the list of these
configuration categories.
Machine Model to Same Model items restored to the same
Machine Model model of machine. (For example,
information that is transferred from
Layout Image one CR Elite System can only be
Configura Viewer restored to other CR Elite Systems.)
tion Editors
Markers
Editor Select the link to see a listing of
these configuration categories.
Patient
Input
Patient
Names
RPDES

Machines Within Same Product Configuration information transferred


Family in this category can be transferred
from one CR to another CR or from
Image All Fields one DR to another DR machine.
Processing
Preference Select the link to view this list of
Editor these configuration categories.

Universal You can copy the following items

216
Key Operator Functions

View All (except among all CR and DR machines.


Configuration fields that are
configured
from the
Image
Processing
Preference
Editor)
Procedure All Fields
Mapping
Configuration
Profile All Fields
Configuration
List All Fields
Configuration
Reject All Fields
Reasons
Trauma All Fields
Defaults
Display All Fields
Configuration
Bar-Code All except
Configuration Device Type
and Com
Port
Display All
Configuration
Delivery All
Preferences
HIS/RIS All Fields
Poling and
Remote
Query
Regional All Fields
Configuration
Long-Length All
Configuration
s
System All
Maintenance
Remote All Fields
Device
Configuration

217
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Security All User


Administrator Configuration
s
Security All Security
Administrator Configuration
s
Security All Roles
Administrator Configuration
s

Backed-up settings can always be restored to the machine from which they were created. You
can back up configurations to a particular drive and restore them to this or another machine.
You can back up information to either the machine hard drive or to the removable media
suitable to the machine computer (may include CD, DVD, USB, or floppy disk devices).
Backing Up Configurations
To back up a configuration:
1. Insert or connect the media to receive the backup file.
2. Select the check boxes of the categories of configuration information that you want to back up,
or Select All.
3. Select the Backup/Restore directory to select a Drive to save the backup to.
4. To create a folder for the backup file, select New Folder and enter the folder name.
5. Highlight the folder name and press Select.
6. Select Backup.
7. When the progress bar indicates the transfer is complete, select OK.

Restoring Configurations
To restore a configuration:
1. Insert or connect the media to receive the backup file.
2. Select the check boxes of the categories of configuration information that you want to backup, or
Select All.
3. Select the Backup/Restore directory to select a Drive to restore the Backup from.
4. Select the folder name of the backup file (if applicable).
5. Select the Select button.
6. Select Restore.
7. When the progress bar indicates the transfer is complete, select OK.

To see all of the configurations listed, select the arrows at the right side of the screen.

218
Key Operator Functions

Navigational Buttons
Select Selects the highlighted directory for backup/restore process.
Select All Selects every configuration for backup or restore process.
Deselect Clears the check box for every selection. No configurations are
All selected.
Backup Writes the selected configurations and hidden parameters to the
selected backup directory.
Restore Loads the selected configurations, or all configurations if you Select
All.
New Creates a folder on the selected drive to contain the configurations.
Folder
Cancel Aborts the backup or restore process.
Save Saves the New Folder name.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and Returns to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

219
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Scanner Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Programming the Automatic Trigger
The Automatic Trigger lets you program the bar-code scanner to be on all of the time, or to be
on only when you touch the manual trigger.
Scan the bar-code listed for the operational mode you choose.
To program the hand-held bar-code reader to its operational mode:
Scan the Automatic Trigger bar-code if you want the scanner on all of the time.
Scan the Manual Trigger bar-code if you want the scanner LEDs off until you touch the trigger.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming Samples 5
How to Configure a Bar-Code

220
Key Operator Functions

Bar-Code Configuration Menu


How to Configure a Bar-Code

Bar-Code Programming

221
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration > Bar-Code
Configuration

Bar-Code Configuration
1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, enter the Prefix, Data, and Suffix information.
2. Select Save Changes.
3. At the Bar-Code Configuration menu, select Bar-Code Programming.
4. Select a category of information that displays sample bar-codes.
5. Scan the appropriate bar-code to configure the bar-code scanner for each change.
You can configure the bar-code to get the result you desire. The selections you make on the
Bar-Code Configuration Screen add or subtract information that is read from the Bar-Code.
For example, if the bar-code is a series of characters such as Pid00001-XX and you need to
change it to 01, the following three options are available to you on the screen:

Field Strip Size Strip Prefix Data Strip Suffix Strip


Size
Patient X 3 X 000 2 X - X
ID
Patient X 6 2 X
ID
Patient X Pid000 2 X -XX
ID

How do I know what will be stripped out?


When you designate Strip, the action is performed from left to right on the Bar-Code
Configuration Screen.
How do I configure for the other fields?
The rules apply the same way for the Accession Number, Tech ID, and Procedure Code fields.
What if all of the fields have the same number of digits?
If the fields contain the same number of digits (Prefix strip size + Data size + Suffix strip size),
then the first field name appears in the Test Field.
What do I do if the Patient ID is the same length as the Cassette ID?
If there is a conflict with the 10-digit Cassette ID field and a field that is 10 characters in length.
1. Go to Main Menu > Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar Code
Configuration > > Bar-Code Configuration.
2. Select: Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits.
3. Select Save Changes

222
Key Operator Functions

4. The You must reprogram the bar-code scanner after changing the Cassette ID Format
Must reprogram bar-code scanner Notification pop-up message appears.
5. Select OK.
6. Return to Bar-Code Programming > Prefix& Suffix and reprogram the bar-code reader.

See also
How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code
Changing the Prefix and Suffix
Bar-Code Configuration
Bar-Code Programming
Bar-Code Programming Samples

223
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration > Bar-Code
Programming

Bar-Code Programming
1. Select the feature you wish to program.
2. Scan the sample bar-code for that feature with the hand-held bar code reader.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming Samples
Country Code
Prefix and Suffix
Automatic Trigger
Beeper Mode
Reread Delay
How to Configure a Bar-Code
Do not scan the test bar-code more than once. If you scan it twice, it will fail.
If you change the Cassette ID format, the country code, or bar code reader prefix or suffix
characters, then you must program the Bar-Code Scanner.

224
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
How to Change the Beeper Mode
This screen lets you change the sound that the hand-held bar-code scanner makes.
1. Select a volume level and scan the appropriate bar-code.
High (default)
Low
Medium
Off
2. Select a tone and scan the appropriate bar-code.
Normal Beep (default)
Short Beep
If the scan is successful, the scanner will emit a tone. If it is not successful, it will emit a buzzing
sound.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming Samples 7
Bar-Code Programming Samples 5

225
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
How to Change the Cassette ID format
If the Cassette ID bar-code format (normally 10 digits in length) conflicts with other bar-codes
in use, you can change the bar-code format to an 11-digit format.
1. Select the Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box.
2. Select Save Changes.
The You must reprogram the bar code scanner after changing the Cassette ID Format
message appears. You must reprogram bar-code scanner when this notification message
appears.
3. Select OK
4. Select Back.
5. Select Bar-Code Programming.
6. Select Prefix & Suffix.
7. Scan all of the bar codes on the Add Prefix and Add Suffix pages.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming
Changing the Prefix and Suffix
Bar-Code Programming Samples

226
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Changing the Country Code
The Country Code selection changes the language of the headings on the Bar-Code
Programming Screen. A reboot is required to make this setting function properly.
1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, select the Country Code data box.
2. Select the country where the CR or DR System resides.
3. Select Save Changes.
4. Select Back, then select Bar-Code Programming.
5. Select Country Code.
6. Use the bar-code scanner to scan the Country Code, the Country, and the Save bar-codes.
7. Scan the Program Country Code.

Program Country Code


8. Scan the numeric bar-code sample for your country.
Country Code Scan Country Scan
Code
Belgium 1 Italy 5
Denmark 8 Norway 9
Finland 2 Spain 10
France 3 Switzerland 6
Germany/Austria 4 USA 0
(Default)
United Kingdom 7

9. Scan Save to program the keyboard for your country.

227
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Save
Generally, the following characters are not supported by the scanner for countries other than the
U.S.:
@| $ # { } [ ] = / ' \ < > ~
You can make all of your changes on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen and then select
Save Changes when finished.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming Samples
How to Configure a Bar-Code

228
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Changing the Data Field Size
1. On the Bar-Code Configuration Screen, select the Data Size field.
2. Enter the number of characters that you want the data size to be.
3. Select Save Changes.
You can make all of your changes on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen and then select
Save Changes when finished.

See also:
Bar-Code Configuration

229
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Changing the Prefix and Suffix
Prefixes are characters (up to ten digits) preceding data which serve as mapping keys. Bar-
codes read into the system containing these prefix characters will populate into the designated
field on the Patient Input and Patient Query screens.
For example, configuring the Accession Number on the Bar-Code Configuration screen via Key
Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code Configuration as such:
Strip enabled (checked)
prefix as "ACN"
Data size of "6."
When you have configured the bar-code (Bar-Code Configuration Screen) so that the Prefix
or Suffix is not used, or an alternate prefix and suffix are used, you must program the scanner to
use the new configuration instead.
How to enter data on the Bar-Code Configuration Screen:
1. For each field, enter the desired Prefix and Suffix Character formats, if any, and set the Data
Size field.
2. Select a field and use the keyboard to enter the data.
3. Enter the number of characters you want to accept in the Data Size field.
4. Select Strip if you want to remove the field when it is read by the bar-code scanner.
5. Select Save Changes and then select Back.
6. Select Bar-Code Programming, then select Prefix and Suffix.
7. Scan the Clear all Prefix or Clear all Suffix bar-codes.
How to add a prefix or suffix:
1. Scan all of the bar-codes on the Add Prefix or Add Suffix page.
2. Scan the Save bar-code.
Leave the Data Size field blank if you want to accept any size data.
Test the Cassette ID to ensure that there are no bar-code conflicts.

See also:
Bar-Code Programming Samples

230
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Configuring Reread Delay
To configure the time delay allowed between reading the same bar-code, select the following
and scan the appropriate bar-code:
Short (default)
Medium
Long
Extra Long
This feature is only available in Automatic Trigger Mode.

See also:
Trigger Modes
Bar-Code Programming Samples 6

231
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Stripping a Bar-Code Field
A bar-code may contain Prefix and Suffix information that must be removed.
For example, the bar-code below may be identified as (BNM,/?<12345678<()\+).
Prefix Data

See also:
How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code
How to Configure a Bar-Code
Bar-Code Configuration
Changing the Data Field Size
How to Change the Prefix and Suffix

232
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Stripping Middle Characters from the Bar-Code
You can configure the bar-code to produce the results you desire.
When you designate Strip, the action is from left to right on the Bar-Code Configuration
Screen.

For example, if the bar-code is a series of characters such as ABC-01752-001 and you need to
change it to AC-01752-1, do the following:
Field Strip Size Strip Prefix Data Strip Suffix Strip
Size
Accession 1 X B 8 X 00
Number

Legend:
Prefix = B
Data = AC-01752-1
Suffix = 00

See also:
How to Configure a Bar-Code
Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen
Changing the Data Field Size
How to Change the Prefix and Suffix

233
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Bar-Code


Configuration
Using the Bar-Code Configuration Screen
The default bar-code that a medical facility uses may not automatically place the patient data in
the correct fields on the Patient Input Screen. You can use the Bar-Code Configuration
Screen to change the way the bar-code scanner identifies the following:
Accession Number
Tech ID
Patient ID
Procedure Code
1. Select the bar-code device:
USB as Serial PS2 to USB Keyboard Serial Scanner
Keyboard Wedge PS2 Keyboard None
2. Select the serial COM Port:
COM1 COM2 COM3
COM4 COM5 COM6

3. Select Save Changes.

The CR or DR system supports the following type of bar-codes:


Code 128

This example of a 128 bar-code indicates a Prefix of -+@# and a data set of 1234567801234.
By configuring the bar-code, you can output only the Data portion of the code 1234567801234.

See also:
How to Strip Middle Characters from a Bar-Code
How to configure a Bar-Code
Bar-Code Programming
Programming the Serial Bar-Code Reader

234
Key Operator Functions

Programming PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader


Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader 2
Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader
Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader 2

235
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples

Bar-Code Programming Samples

Program Country Code

Clear All Prefix

Clear All Suffix

Test Code

236
Key Operator Functions

Add Prefix

Add Suffix

< Next >

237
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 2)

Number 0

Number 1

Number 2

Number 3

Number 4

238
Key Operator Functions

Number 5

< Previous | Next >

239
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 3)

Number 6

Number 7

Number 8

Number 9

Save

240
Key Operator Functions

< Previous | Next >

241
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 4)

Bar-Code A

Bar-Code B

Bar-Code C

Bar-Code D

Bar-Code E

242
Key Operator Functions

Bar-Code F

< Previous | Next >

243
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 5)

Code 39 Full ASCII On

Automatic Trigger

Beep Tone Normal

Code 39 Full ASCII Off

Manual Trigger

244
Key Operator Functions

Beep Tone Short

< Previous | Next >

245
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 6)

Reread Delay Short

Reread Delay Medium

Reread Delay Long

Reread Delay Extra Long

< Previous | Next >

246
Key Operator Functions

Bar-Code Programming Samples (Page 7)

Beep Volume High

Beep Volume Medium

Beep Volume Low

Beep Volume Off

< Previous >

247
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader


Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right and top to bottom.
Standard Product Keyboard
Defaults Wedge

Add Prefix 9

9 0

4 0

4 0

4 Save

248
Key Operator Functions

Add Suffix 9

9 0

4 0

4 0

4 Save

249
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader and


Add Suffix
In addition to Programming the Keyboard Wedge Bar-Code Reader, if the Add # to Cassette
IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following bar-codes in order (left to
right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes, which are
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types.
Add Suffix 6

5 2

3 0

4 0

4 0

4 Save

250
Key Operator Functions

251
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader


Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right, top to bottom.
Standard Product Defaults Emulate Keyboard

Add Prefix 9

9 0

4 0

4 0

4 Save

252
Key Operator Functions

Add Suffix 9

9 0

4 0

4 Save

253
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader and Add


Suffix
In addition to Programming the PS2 Keyboard Bar-Code Reader, if the Add # to Cassette IDs
to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following bar-codes in order (left to
right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes, which are
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types.
Add Suffix 6

5 2

3 0

4 0

4 0

4 Save

254
Key Operator Functions

255
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader


Scan the bar-codes in the following order: left to right, top to bottom.
Standard Product Defaults Emulate Keyboard

Add Prefix 9

9 5

B Save

Add Suffix 9

9 5

256
Key Operator Functions

D Save

257
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader


and Add Suffix
In addition to Programming the PS2 to USB Keyboard Bar-Code Reader, if the Add to
Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following bar-codes in
order (left to right, top to bottom). This only affects Carestream Health Cassette ID bar-codes,
which are Interleaved 2 of 5 bar-code types.
Add Suffix 6

5 2

3 5

D Save

258
Key Operator Functions

Programming the Serial Scanner Bar-Code Reader


The Serial Bar-Code Reader must have two connectors: one for the serial port and one for
power (such as a PS2 connector).
1. Scan the following bar-codes left to right, top to bottom.
Standard Product

Defaults

Serial Port

9600 Baud, 7 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Even Parity

2. If the Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following
bar code.
Add # Suffix for Interleaved 2 of 5 via Data Formatter

259
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Programming the USB as Serial Bar-Code Reader


1. Scan the bar-codes in the following order:
Standard Product Defaults

USB Emulating Serial Port

2. If the Add # to Cassette IDs to make them 11 digits check box is checked, scan the following
bar-code.
Add #Suffix for Interleaved 2 of 5 via Data Formatter

260
Key Operator Functions

HIS/RIS Communications Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > HIS/RIS


Configuration
How to Configure for a Polling Query
A polling query lets the CR System communicate with the Radiology Information System
(RIS), to display the patient Work List. You can also query the RIS for individual patients.
To configure a Polling Query:
1. Set up the type of query and interval to the PACS Broker:
HIS/RIS Polling Query
2. Modify HIS/RIS Options:
HIS/RIS Options
HIS/RIS Options
At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration, HIS/RIS Broker
Configuration, and then select HIS/RIS Options.
PACS Common Configuration
HIS/RIS AE Title Broker Name, normally BROKER
HIS/RIS IP Address PACS Broker IP Address
HIS/RIS Port PACS Broker Port, normally 3320

Enter the information for your system and select Save Changes.

Other HIS/RIS Options


1. Select the check box to automatically delete canceled studies from the system when the status
is Cancelled.
2. Select the check box again to clear it if you do not want this action.
3. Select the check box to send the Scheduled Workflow MPPS Command (optional feature).

The selection for the following list is determined by the Procedure Mapping configuration of the
HIS/RIS Broker. To change selections, the Broker must be reconfigured.
HIS/RIS Procedure Mapping
DICOM Field Name DICOM Tag Requested
Procedure Code
Sequence

261
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Procedure ID (0040, 1001) NA


Procedure Code (0032,1064) (0008, 0100)
Scheduled Procedure Step (0040, 0100) (0008, 0100)
Sequence,
(0040, 0008)
Performed Protocol Code
Sequence

The purpose of this screen is to select which RIS is used with CR Procedure Mapping.

If you enable your system for Scheduled Workflow, PerformedProtocol Code is selected
automatically, and is not configurable.
Navigation Buttons
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the
Menu system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

See also:
HIS/RIS Polling Query
HIS/RIS Configuration

See also:
HIS/RIS Configuration

262
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > HIS/RIS Configuration > HIS/RIS Polling and Remote
Query

HIS/RIS Polling Query


The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR and DR Systems utilize DICOM Work List Management to
receive study information from the hospitals HIS/RIS.
The Remote Query, Polling, and Options Tabs let you set up your System to communicate
with the HIS/RIS in any combination of the tables in the following links:
Remote Query
Remote Query Active Select to permit a Query of the HIS/RIS from the CR or DR
System.
Modality Select the modality: CR, DX, RT, All

Filter by Station Name Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the
information. Only records that contain matching data in
these fields appear.
Filter by AE Title Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the
information. Only records that contain matching data in
these fields appear.
Station Name/AE Title Enter your station names or AE Title.
The system retrieves records that contain only the names
specified.

The system sends an immediate request for records to the hospital's HIS/RIS system, queried
from the Patient Query Screen.

Polling
Poll Model Active Select to activate Polling Configuration.

Modality Select the modality: CR, DX, RT, All

Filter by Station Name Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the
information. Only records that contain matching data in
these fields appear.
Filter by AE Title Select either Station Name or AE Title to filter the
information. Only records that contain matching data in
these fields appear.
Station Name/AE Title Enter your station names or AE Title.
The system retrieves records that contain only the names
specified.

263
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

The System requests records at a defined interval, filtered by modality, station name, A/E title,
and date and time. Carestream Health recommends approximately 100 records per poll.

Polling Interval
Hours Before Current Time.
Hours After Current Time.
Minutes Between Search Updates.
Initial search time: (default is 12 hours from the current time, range 1 - 48 hours). Only records
that have a date and time that falls in this range appear.

264
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Customizable


Field Description
How to Change Field Descriptions
To change the dialect used in the User Interface:
To add or change a dialect or change the field descriptions that appear in the CR or DR
interface:
1. Select the phrase that appears in the Translation column.
2. Select the Customized Translation column on the right side.
3. Retype the phrase.
4. Select Enter.
5. Select Save Changes.
Navigation Buttons
Save Completes the action by writing changes to the local
Changes database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main
Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

265
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Long-Length


Configuration
Long-Length Imaging Configuration
Long-Length Configuration for CR Systems lets you enter the Source to Image Distance for
vertical and portable cassettes. You can also select a delivery method:
Deliver only the composite image
Inspect composite images before delivery
Deliver composite images without inspection
Required Source to Image (SID) values
For Long-Length Vertical Cassette Holder, a value from 152 cm to 229 cm (60 in. to 90 in.) is
recommended.
For Long-Length Portable Cassette (supine), a value of 59 in. (150 cm) is recommended.
For Long-Length Portable Cassette (erect), a value of 59 in. (150 cm) is recommended.
To configure for Long-length Imaging:
1. Enter the SID value for the cassette(s) you will be using.
2. Select the check box if you want all sub-images automatically marked as delivered after the
composite image is complete. The sub-images are not actually delivered.
3. Select the radio button for the image processing mode you desire: QA mode or Pass-Through
Mode for the composite image.
4. Select Save Changes.
QA Mode: Delivers composite images after inspection.
Pass-through Mode: Delivers composite images automatically without inspection.
Navigation Buttons
Save Completes the action by writing changes to the local
Changes database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main
Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

266
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > System


Maintenance
Setting the Limits for Image Retention
The System Maintenance Screen lets you set high and low limits for use of disk space,
balancing between performance and image retention.
This screen lets you determine the criteria used by the system to automatically erase images or
delete patient records.
Disk High Water Mark Disk High Water Mark is Enter the percentage of
set for optimum disk space to allow
performance at before automatic clean-
installation. up occurs.
80% is recommended.
Disk Low Water Mark Disk Low Water Mark is Enter the percentage of
set for optimum disk space that you
performance at want the clean-up to
installation. reach.
75% is recommended.
Maximum Rejected Retaining rejected Enter the maximum
Images Allowed images is optional. number of rejected
images to allow in the
The number of rejected
system before deleting.
images stored affects
the total number of
available images in the
system.
Patient Record Delete Permits retention of Enter the number of
Age patient information days a patient record
without patient images. can remain on the
system before deleting.

1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration.


2. Select System Maintenance.
3. Enter the value in each field from the keyboard.
4. Select Save Changes.

267
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Color


Preferences
Color Preferences Configuration
The color groups are divided as follows:
All Colors
Status Colors
General Application Colors
To change the colors of the interface:
1. Select the radio button of the color group at the top of the screen.
2. Make a selection from the Description column that you want to give a different color to.
3. Select the color from the Color Tab or the full-range Color Palette Tab.
4. Select Save Changes.
Select all of the color changes and then select Save Changes when you are finished.

You can view the colors that have already been used by selecting the Used Colors Tab.

Select Reset to reset the list. Select to reset the color to the factory default.
You can select a general, overall color scheme for buttons and backgrounds to save time. At the
bottom of the screen select either Apply Gray Theme or Apply Blue Theme in order to
automatically select a color-coordinated palette for common groups of preferences.
For a quick reference to the palette you are using, select Colors in Use. These palettes will
clearly display the colors that are designated within your system.
Navigational Buttons
Save Completes the action by writing the information to the local
Changes database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

268
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Delivery


Preferences
Delivery Preferences Configuration
Delivery Preferences lets you set the defaults for information delivery.
Hospital Name Determines the Hospital Name that you want to associate with
the images.
Hospital Address Names the address of the hospital that you want to associate
with the images.
Operating Mode Selects the default operating mode:
QA mode
Auto Display
Pass-Through Mode
QA by Study (DR)
Pixel Spacing Selects pixel spacing for workstations that require the (0018,
1164) Imager Pixel Spacing and require the (0028, 0030)
Pixel Spacing field.
Uppercase for all Selects the DICOM header to appear in all capital letters by
DICOM fields default.
Delivery Mode Determines whether the film delivery will be:
Best Use of Film (allows for a counter-clockwise 90-degree
rotation when placing the image on the film. Best Use of Film
provides a larger image size (maximizing film usage)

Shrink to Fit (does not allow this extra rotation).


Select the Shrink to Fit check box if images are rotated when printing
multiple images on a single film.
Send patient Sends all images in L/F orientation. This means the
orientation DICOM workstation will not rotate the image when it is received.
tag (0020:0020)
using L/F
Use CR IOD Prevents an error when determining if DX or MG is supported.
It means always use the CR DICOM IOD, instead of DX or
MG IOD.
Previous product always sent images in the CR image space.
DX IOD has many extra DICOM tags, but not all workstations
can understand DX. In that case, CR IOD is used by default.
Translate Body Provides a choice to translate body part and projection, or
Part and Projection leave in English.

269
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Delivery Preferences lets you select the general image instance number:
Every image is its own Series. Instance Number is always 1.
Every image is its own Series. Instance Number is unique.
Every image is in the same Series. Instance Number is unique.
The Image Instance Tab has different configurations to help with hanging protocols at the
PACS. Consult your PACS Administrator to determine which setting is required for your PACS
system.

See also:
Storage Commitment Support
QA Mode
Pass-through Mode

270
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Display


Configuration
Display Configuration
Display Configuration lets you customize the way data displays on the Patient Query, Patient
Input, and other screens.
To speed up data entry, make the following changes to the default display on these screens.
Patient Query Use the radio button to select the Result Sort Order or the results of
Screen how a remote or local query would be sorted by default.
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Select which field contains the cursor when the Patient Query
Screen is first displayed.
Patient ID
Accession Number
Patient Last Name
Patient Query Defaults lets you set the defaults on the Patient Query
Screen.
Study Status Values
Scheduled
Arrived
Started
Scheduled/Arrived/Started
Scheduled/Arrived
Completed
Failed Update
Cancelled
All
Time Window
Today
Today-Tomorrow
Yesterday-Tomorrow
Past Week-Tomorrow

271
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Unrestricted
Modality
CR
DX
RT
All
Patient Input Select the output of images based on the workflow you use.
Screen Procedure Step or New Study Creation.
Create new Procedure Steps from Patient Input.
A Study Instance Unique Identifier (SIUID) and a New Procedure
Step are generated each time you select New Procedure Step for
that patient.
Create new Studies from the Patient Input Screen.
Select the way the Profiles will be applied in the workflow.
Profile change applies to current step only.
Profile change applies to all incomplete steps for this patient.
Require confirmation to end a Procedure Step. A pop-up message
will appear if this option is selected.
After accepting all images in one or more procedure steps or studies,
set the status to Completed.
Auto-populate Tech ID with logged-in user.
Auto-populate the Tech ID field with the logged-in user.
Display Tutor image.
Select the check box to allow when the Query panel can be used on
the Patient Input Screen.
Always
When the image has been delivered
When the Study has been started
Other Image Viewer Options
Display ID Window -Select to display the ID window on the image
Viewer Screen. You can use this to identify the orientation of the
cassette during the exposure. Adjust the size of the Region of
Interest (ROI) box that appears in the Preference Editor.

Keyboard Clicks
Allows an audible "click" when a virtual keypad is selected.

272
Key Operator Functions

Audio Volume
Set the speaker volume by moving the slider control.
Blue Tint
Use the slider control to set the amount of blue tint to add to images
displayed on the CR, DR, or ROP.
Patient Link Fast Patient Switching
Patient Link Enabled - This allows you to select patients from the
Quick menu for faster access.
Repeat Patients
Number of shortcuts
Enter the number of shortcuts allowed
Button Sort Order
Most recently accessed appears at the top of the list
Most recently accessed appears at the bottom of the list

273
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Flagged Image


Harvesting Flagged Images
The Flagged Image List provides a quick and easy way to export images from the system for
further evaluation. The Flagged Image List looks very much like the Image List. You can
search the list using the bar-code scanner to input Patient Name, Patient ID, Accession
Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition Date (or enter manually).
Place checks in the check boxes on the list to indicate which images you want to harvest.
Flagged Image List Controls
Quick Menu Provides a quick access to functions such as logout,
shutdown, and special interest features.
Select All Selects all available items that are listed after one of the
filter categories have been applied.
Clear Fields Clears all of the criteria that has been entered to locate a
patient.
Harvest Checked Sends a copy of the image to a removable disk for further
Images evaluation.
Unflag Selected Image Removes the status of flagged image from any selected
images.
Main Menu Returns you to the CR Main Menu screen, exiting the
Flagged Image List.
Back Returns you to the previous function or page.
New Folder Creates a new folder to send the harvested images to.
Select Highlights the destination folder and then directs the
images.

To harvest images:
1. Filter the list using the search filters:
All Images
Flagged Images
Rejected Images
2. Use the check boxes to the left of each thumbnail to select the image of interest, or Select All
images.
3. Select Harvest all Checked Images.
4. Select a destination directory.
5. Select the Select button.

274
Key Operator Functions

A transfer icon appears at the top of the screen to indicate that the transfer is in progress. The
icon disappears when the transfer is complete and a pop-up message confirms that the harvest
was successful.
For any image you can remove all protected health data by selecting the Remove PHI data
(Protected Health Information) check box.
Select the Unflag the Image after Harvesting check box to return the image to the workflow.
To harvest images to a CD/DVD:
1. Filter the list with the search filters described above.
2. Use the check boxes to the left of each thumbnail to select the image of interest, or Select All
images.
3. Select Harvest all Checked Images.
4. Select a destination directory.
5. Select CD ROM.
6. Select Select.
To change the destination:
When you select Harvest Checked Images, a screen appears for you to select the destination
directory.
1. Select the directory pull-down menu to see available directories. You can select New Folder
and give it a name.
2. Highlight the folder you want and then select Select. The selected images are copied there.
Why Didn't My Images Transfer?
Images cannot be harvested if enough space is not available on the destination drive. The total
space required and the available space are reported on the screen. If the images did not
transfer, make room on the destination drive and harvest the files again.

275
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Monitor Calibration

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration


Monitor Calibration Introduction
Monitor Calibration checks the D-Max and color values and calibrates the monitor to provide a
consistent viewing standard so that images display the same way throughout your system.
Perform only the following two tests:
o Luminance Tracking: This test computes an index for each video display and tells how
well the video system matches a specific luminance response model. Tracking checks a
computed index, the white level, the black level, and luminance values for red, green, and
blue primaries.
o Luminance Gamma Correction: Corrects in conformance with the DICOM Part 14
Grayscale Standard Display Function or other gamma models for your system.
Required equipment:
o All Monitors for CR or DR Systems, and Remote Operations Panels
o The VERILUM CHROMA Photometer
Perform these tests with a low level of ambient light.
Perform these tests at the following intervals:
o Measure the Luminance for Tracking every 2 to 4 weeks
o Measure the Luminance for Gamma every 3 months
Why Can't I Start the Test?
The test targets may be grayed out.
On the bottom of the VERILUM Main Menu, the message "cannot open pod or determine pod
type" may appear. The pod must be plugged into a USB port before you start the application.
Return to the Key Operator System Configuration menu, plug in the pod, and select Monitor
Configuration again.

See also:
How Do I Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Pod?
How Do I Calibrate the Monitor?
How Do I Measure the Luminance for Gamma?
How Do I Measure the Luminance for Tracking?
Monitor Configuration
How to Calibrate the Touch-screen

276
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration


Display Pro for General Radiography
The Display Pro test target provides a visual check for monitor calibration.
To use the test target:
1. View the top row of density patches on your monitor.
You should be able to distinguish the rectangles along the top row of wedges.
Do not use this Help screen to evaluate your monitor.
2. View the targets in the row labeled Contrast Targets for Visual Evaluation.
If you can see contrast between the light and dark circular half-moon patterns within all of
the patches on the top row, the monitor is calibrated as expected. If you cannot see circular
patterns in all of the patches, calibrate the monitor.
The lower set of patches labeled Density Steps for Measurement and Objective Evaluation
are used for evaluation by your Service Representative.
You can send the Display Pro image to evaluate the calibration of a PACS workstation or to
evaluate the performance of a printer. The printed Display Pro image represents the same
measurement of visual confirmation as it does when viewed on the monitor.

277
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration


SMPTE Test Target
Check the SMPTE test pattern on the Monitor Configuration Screen before and after testing
Luminance for Tracking and Luminance for Gamma.
You should see a 5% contrast difference in the two squares shown below with a red outline on
the SMPTE test pattern.

278
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration


Monitor Calibration
1. Adjust the room lighting to a low level of ambient light.
2. Plug in the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer.
3. Place the pod face down on a dark, opaque surface for a few seconds.
4. At the Monitor Configuration Screen, select Photometer Calibration.
See How to Measure Luminance Response for Gamma.
See How to Measure Luminance Response for Tracking.
Why Can't I Start the Test?
The pod must be plugged into a USB port before you start the application.
Return to the Key Operator System Configuration menu, plug in the pod, and select Monitor
Configuration again.

See also:
Monitor Calibration Introduction
Monitor Configuration Screen

279
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration > Touch-Screen


Calibration
Touch-screen Calibration
Once calibrated properly, a monitor's touch-screen should not need to be recalibrated for the
remaining life of the monitor.
1. From a position directly viewing the monitor, with your finger, select and release each of the
three red targets as they appear on the screen.
2. Select and drag your finger across the screen to check the cursor's response.
3. Select OK if the cursor follows your finger, or select Return to repeat the calibration process.
4. When the calibration is complete, select OK to return to the interface.
Caution! Selecting the screen in areas other than the red targets may cause the screen to
behave in an unpredictable manner.
If the calibration times out, and no changes are made, the system remains at the current
calibration.
Why Can't I Get to the Calibration Screen?
The touch-screen calibration program guides you through a careful calibration process so the
cursor will respond precisely to a precise selection on the interface.
If you cannot get to the monitor calibration screen or select the test targets, try accessing the
screen with the mouse. If the touch-screen cannot be accessed because it has been put far out
of calibration, call Service.

280
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Monitor configuration


Measuring Luminance for Tracking
1. Place the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer in the center of the square target.
2. Select Continue.
3. Hold the pod gently in place until the test progress reaches 17. A graph signifies the end of the
test.
4. Select Close.
Always hold the pod gently in the center of the target.

Do not press too hard!

Do not save the information to a MACBETH Color Chart. Luminance for Tracking is a black-and-
white test.

See also:
Monitor Calibration Introduction
Measuring Luminance for Gamma
Monitor Calibration

281
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration


Measuring Luminance for Gamma
1. Place the VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer in the center of the square target.
2. Select Continue.
3. Hold the pod firmly in place until the test progress indicator reaches 33.
4. Select Close.
Always hold the pod gently in the center of the target.

Do not press too hard!

See also:
Monitor Calibration Introduction
Measuring Luminance for Tracking

282
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Monitor Configuration


How to Order a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer
To obtain a VERILUM CHROMA 5 Photometer (required), go to the Web site:
http://www.image-smiths.com.
The product is VERILUM V5.2 Software with CHROMA 5 Pod. You do not need to install the
software on the Modality in order to use the photometer.

283
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Regional


Configuration
Regional Configuration
To customize the display on the modality for your region:
Select: Change: Change
using:
Language The language that the system will display Multi-lingual
international
keyboard.
Time The time zone that the modality resides in International
Zone Time Zone
keyboard.
Date Default/MM/DD/YYYY;DD/MM/YYYY;YYYY/MM/DD Radio button
Format selection.
Calendar Gregorian Check if yes;
clear if no.
Military Check box Check if yes,
Time clear if no.
Decimal Preferred symbol to separate decimal for your Select from
Separator region alphanumeric
keyboard.
Data Preferred symbol to separate data, such as the Select from
Separator period, forward slash, comma, etc.( . / , ) alphanumeric
keyboard.
Time Preferred symbol to separate time, such as the Select from
Separator colon ( :) alphanumeric
keyboard.
Current Enter the current date Enter from
Date numeric
keyboard.
Current Enter the current time Enter from
Time numeric
keyboard.

284
Key Operator Functions

System Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Layout


Configuration
Layout Configuration
Layout Configuration lets you configure the layout of:
Image Viewer Editors
Markers Editors
Patient Input Screen
Patient Names
Remote Patient Data Entry System
The Key Operator can select the layout of key screens when configuring the organization of
feature display.
To make layout changes:
Image Viewer Add, remove, or reorder the editors in the Image Viewer to
Editors enhance your workflow.
The Image Viewer
Editors Screen is divided
into two parts. The portion
on the left is labeled
Disabled Editors. The
portion on the right is
labeled Enabled Editors.
The list of Editors consists
of all of the features that
appear on the Image
Viewer Screen.
To change the order of
the editors:
1. Select an Editor from
the Enabled Editors list.
The Editor will be
highlighted when
selected.
2. Select the arrows to the
right of the list to move
the Editor to another
position.
The arrows on the far
right move the

285
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

selected Editor to the


top or bottom of the list
3. Select Save Changes.
This selection moves
the position of the
Editor on the Image
Viewer Screen.
To remove an editor
from the Image Viewer
Screen:
1. Select an Editor from
the Enabled Editors list.
The Editor will be
highlighted when
selected.
2. Select the arrow to the
bottom of the list to
move the Editor to the
Disabled Editors List.
The arrows on the
bottom move the
selected Editor to the
left or right of the list.
3. Select Save Changes.
This selection moves
the position of the
Editor from the Image
Viewer Screen.

Patient Input Select the name of the layout format to see the samples
Screen in the blue link.

Patient Input
Screen Layout
Samples
Select the blue link from
the table below to view the
appearance of the sample
layout.
Exclude Hospital
Location Default
and with

286
Key Operator Functions

Priority Multi-byte
Name
Exclude Simplified
Middle with
Name, Multi-byte
Location, Name
and
Priority
Hospital MP
Default Controls
with with
Middle Patient
Name Data
Hospital Simplified
Default Data with
without Patient
Middle Age
Name

Markers Editor Change existing layouts of Marker groups. Design your


own markers.
The Markers Editor lets
you customize the marker
palette on the Image
Viewer Screen.
Add a marker before
the selected column.
Add a new row above a
selected marker.
Add a new row below a
selected marker.
Add a marker after a
selected column.
Change the order the
markers display.
Select a transparent
background for Text
Markers.
To add a marker to an
existing Marker group:
1. Select a group icon
such as Favorites.
2. Select a marker on the
palette.

287
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

The marker is
highlighted.
3. Select from the control
tabs at the right of the
palette, such as Add
Marker before Column.
4. Enter the marker label
in the Free Form Text
field.
5. Save Changes.
6. The new marker
appears.
If you accidentally deleted
a marker, such as the
arrow or Right or Left
marker, select the Marker
Images Tab and select a
replacement.
Selecting the yellow
triangle opens a blank
palette that you can fill
with markers of your
choice. The palette is
limited to 5 rows across
and 6 rows down.
To reset any palette to its
original condition, select
Restore Factory
Defaults.
Remote Patient Data Use the Default setting unless your region specifies the
Entry System (RPDES) need to support Multi-byte Names.
Patient Names Select the radio button for Single Byte Names or Single
and Multiple Byte Names.

288
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > List


Configuration
List Configuration
To create a list that the radiographer can pick from when entering data:
1. In Key Operator > System Configuration > List Configuration, select a list name:
Department Name, Referring Physician, or Tech ID.
2. Select New Tab.
3. Select the Tab size based on the number of items you want in the list.
4. Select a button and enter the name in edit mode.
5. Select the Color Tab and select a color.
6. Select Save Changes.
Make sure that you place the button on the tab you want. You cannot move a button from one
tab to another.
You can enter five tabs of 40 entries, or 200 items per list. You can also change the title and
color of the tab label.
Navigation Buttons
New Tab Select the matrix size based on the number of items you will have in
your list. Choose from 4 x 5, 5 x 5, 6 x 5, 7 x 5, 8 x 5. You can enter up
to five tabs of data per list.
Delete Deletes the tab of information from the list. A prompt asks you if you are
Tab sure. There is no recovery from deleting a tab.
Show Displays the button in the list in the interface. Toggles to Hide Button.
Button
Hide Hides the button display on the interface. Toggles to Show Button.
Button
Main Exits the current screen and Returns to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.
To change button colors or move buttons on a tab:
Use the Tab Controls that appear at the bottom of the screen:
Keyboard The keyboard becomes active when you select a button. The button
becomes active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.
Color Lets you select the colors of the buttons from over 200 individual
colors. Select the color you desire.
Color Lets you select from a full color palette of blended hues.
Palette

289
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Move Lets you move the button to another position on the tab. "Move" does
not let you move the button to another tab.

290
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Procedure


Mapping Configuration
Procedure Mapping Configuration (optional)
Use Procedure Mapping to save data entry time on the Patient Input Screen and add
consistency to procedure preparation.
Procedure Mapping lets the Key Operator associate a set of Views with a particular Procedure
Name or code.
Studies that come from a HIS/RIS select a procedure that matches a code.
The radiographer can select a procedure manually using the procedure keyboard.
The procedures are categorized so that they are easy to locate, even when there are thousands
to choose from.
To set up pre-defined procedures:
1. Choose an existing Region, or Select Add, then enter a Region.
For example, Thorax, Spine, Upper extremity, Lower extremity.
2. Choose an existing exam, or Select Add, then enter an Exam.
For example, Adult Chest, Pediatric Chest, Sternum, Ribs.
3. You can modify an existing Procedure Name (by selecting Turn Edit On) or select Add, then
enter a procedure name.
4. Enter a Procedure Code to match the code sent by the HIS/RIS in the Procedure Code field on
the Patient Input Screen. This will automatically populate the views when selecting a patient
record.
5. You can select a Destination Profile. However, you should leave this field blank for the CR
modality.
6. Save Changes.
7. Select Add in the Views box, then enter the desired Views for the procedure. You can add
Views from different categories. Select Delete to remove highlighted Views from a procedure.
Use the second column of arrows (located to the right of the Views) to rearrange the order in
which the Views display at the Patient Input Screen. The top View will display first at the
Patient Input Screen.
To delete a procedure:
Go to Procedure Mapping to delete a procedure.
To define Views to use with Procedure Mapping:
View Configuration lets you add, delete, and modify views for use in procedure mapping.
Navigation Buttons
Change Multi-format Lets you add a multi-format configuration to the
Configuration procedure, such as 2-up lengthwise to 4-up

291
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

crosswise.
Change View Configuration Quick access to View Configuration. Lets you add,
delete, and modify views for use in procedure
mapping. Select the Back button in View
Configuration to return to Procedure Mapping.
Turn Edit On Lets you edit the procedure. Select this button to
make changes such as name, category (body
part, position) procedure code, destination, auto
position.
Save Changes Completes the action by writing changes to the
local database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the
system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

See also:
Using the Multi-format Configuration Screen

292
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Reject Reason


Configuration
Reject Reasons Configuration
This option lets you build a total list of 10 Reject Reasons that a radiographer can choose from
when rejecting an image.
To create a list of Reject Reasons:
1. From Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Reject Reasons.
2. Select Add Reject Reason.
3. Type the Reject Reason and select Enter.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Reject Reason.
5. Select Save Changes.
To create the maximum number of Reject Reasons:
You can create up to nine Reject Reasons. The 10th reason is listed as Other Reason, which
can be renamed but not deleted.
The following default reasons may be used or deleted:
Clipped Anatomy
Motion
Positioning Error
Artifact
Technique
Duplicate
Test/Service/Blank
To delete a Reject Reason:
Select the reject reason, and then select Delete Reject Reason.
To create statistics of Reject Reasons:
If the Track Rejects button is not selected, no prompt for the reject reason is provided.
Select the Track Rejects check box to enable the radiographer to select a reject reason.
Navigation Buttons
Save Completes the action and writes the data to the system database.
Changes
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Cancel Returns you to the previous function without changing to another
screen.

293
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

The Cancel button toggles to the Back button after you have selected
Save Changes.
The Cancel button displays the Confirm changes confirmation dialog.
It does not immediately leave the screen.

294
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Required


Fields
Required Fields Configuration
To make sure that certain radiographers fill in the appropriate fields, you should configure those
fields so the radiographer must fill them in before the exam can be delivered.
The Required Fields Configuration screen lets you determine which fields must be filled in on
the Patient Input Screen before an exam is submitted or delivered.
You can set required fields for delivery to mandatory destinations, such as archives, or for
submitting exam/patient information. For example, you may want to make Tech ID a required
field if you are using Reject Reason logging.
Making a field Required to Submit guarantees that the radiographer enters all required
Exam/Patient Information at the time the patient record is submitted to the database.
Making a field Required to Deliver prevents images that are missing key fields from going to
the Archive (mandatory destination) until those fields are filled in.
This prevents you from sending images that have incomplete patient demographic
information to workstations and printers only, until the radiographer enters the required
information and accepts the image. The system then forwards the image to the mandatory
destination.
1. Select each field check box you want to include from the Field Name list.
2. Select Required for Submission and / or Required for Delivery.
3. Select Editable if you want the radiographer to be able to edit the field.
4. Select Save Changes.
If you are using Reject Reasons, you may want to make Tech ID a required field.

Navigational Buttons
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.

295
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Viewer Editor Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
Changing Image Processing Preferences
The Image Processing Preference Editor provides controls so that you can change the look of
images from the Primary Category (all images in an anatomical region) to a Secondary
Category (all body parts of that type) or from an individual View. The Image Processing
Preference Editor lets you determine the Look of the images based on your preference.
To use the Editor:
1. Select the Select New View button and select a Primary Category.
2. Select a Secondary Category.
3. Select a View.
Selecting the Close button after selecting a Primary or Secondary Category will make your
changes apply to all of the Views in that category.
4. Select the Change Look button.
Use this to select one of the pre-configured looks first to approximate the desired Look.
5. Adjust the individual slider controls to fine-tune the desired effect.
6. Select the View Before and After button to compare your changes.
7. Select the View After Only button to see your selection.
8. Select Deliver to send the image to destinations for evaluation.
Never make any changes based on a single image. Always use at least 5 to 6 images (of
different body uses for the same View) when changing image preferences.
Read this Before You Make a Change in the Preference Editor
Before making a change in the Preference Editor, check the following:
Is the equipment calibrated? Verify that the calibration of your printers,
monitors, and workstations are correct. See
Monitor Configuration, Introduction in Key
Operator's Help.
Is the image consistently too Before making a change, verify the consistency
light or too dark? of the view from other patient images.
Have you saved the changes? Make all of the changes and save them before
exiting the screen.

Changing the Look of a View


1. Select the Select New View button.

296
Key Operator Functions

2. Select Primary and Secondary Category, and View that already exists in the system (or close
the window at the desired level).
3. Select Change Look to select a starting point for correction.
4. Select Accept this Look.
5. Change the image processing values to correct the image by moving the slider controls.
6. Select View Before and After to compare your changes.
7. Select View After only.
8. Select Deliver to select a printer or a workstation to send the image to for evaluation..
9. Select Save Changes.
There is no confirmation on the status of the delivered image.

Navigational Buttons
Select New View Select New View lets you select a Primary Category,
Secondary Category, or an individual view. When you select
an entire Category, the changes you make affect every view
in that category.
For example:
Select the Thorax Category.
Select the Close button (red X).
Change Chest AP Brightness from 3 to 5 (+2), thus changing
Chest Lateral, currently at 6, to 8 (+2).
Select Save Changes.
Since Thorax is the highest level, this selection changes all
images at all levels.
The Viewer is color-coded to indicate the level you have
chosen.
Change Look Pre-configured examples of Brightness, Latitude, Detail
Contrast, Sharpness, and Noise to choose from to start
building the look you want.
Deliver Select the workstation or printer to send the image to.
View Before & After Displays the image before adjustment and after.
Zoom Use the Zoom feature to evaluate images. To return to
normal view, select Zoom to clear the check box.
When the image is in Zoom mode, you can change the
viewing area by "panning" or changing the view by selecting
the image area by selecting a point on the image and
dragging across the image area.
Select the image and drag across.

297
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

When the image is in zoom mode you can:


change image processing characteristics
save changes
Region of Interest Lets you determine the EI of any point on the image. The
mean, max, min, and standard deviation of the exposure for
the selected location is displayed in a rectangle around the
selected point of interest. The size of the Region of Interest is
configurable by the Key Operator in Display Configuration.
Save Changes Completes the action by writing to the local database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns to the Main Menu.
Back/Cancel The Cancel button returns you to the previous function
without changing to another screen.
The Cancel button toggles to the Back button after you have
selected Save Changes.

See also:
Adjusting Image Parameters
Adjusting Image Quality Controls
Changing the Look
Using View Before and After

298
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
What Is a Look?
Looks are different recipes for processing the images that take into consideration the degree of
brightness, latitude, detail contrast, sharpness and noise that radiologists like. Every institution
chooses its Look from a family of Looks provided by Carestream Health, Inc. and can then
customize exams to its own taste using the Image Processing Preference Editor.
The Family of Looks

Look Name Description


Premium Processing with noise Default Look from factory. Base models
suppression (no biases) used in clinical study. Noise
suppression consistent with Low
Exposure Optimization.
Fixed Processing with medium contrast, Models which have fixed rendering
detail, and sharpness parameters. Noise suppression same as
above.
Premium Processing with brighter Default Look biased to produce brighter,
processing, more detail, and sharpness sharper, more detailed renderings with
custom noise suppression.
Premium Processing with high contrast Default Look biased to be higher in
and detail contrast (less latitude) and detail with
custom noise suppression.
Premium Processing with more latitude Default Look biased to provide on
average slightly greater latitude and
detail than the CR Premium Look with
custom noise suppression.
Premium Processing with medium Default Look biased to be less digital in
latitude appearance, in line with a medium
latitude analog film Look.
Baseline Image Processing Mimics Non-EVP Plus processing.
Premium 2 Image Processing with noise Now has a DR mimic Look for General
suppression Radiography.

See also:
Changing the Look

299
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

What Is a DICOM GSDF-calibrated Monitor?


Grayscale Standard Display Function (GSDF) is a standard designed for high-quality output
from computer monitors used to view X-ray images. The calibration procedure is listed in the
DICOM standard part 14.

300
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
Region of Interest (ROI) Tool
The ROI Tool calculates the statistics about the code values and optical density of a user-
specified area of the CR image. The tool displays the mean, minimum, maximum and standard
deviation values for the code values within the area specified by the user on the image. The
code value measurements are from the raw, unprocessed image and the optical density
measurements are from the processed image.
The ROI Tool is accessible only to Key Operators. After selecting the location to be included in
the ROI calculations on the CR display by using a finger touch or mouse-click, the measurement
appears. The Key Operator can configure the size of the selected region of interest to be from 1
x 1 mm cm to 10 x 10 mm cm on the Display Configuration Screen.
Select Region of Interest to identify the Exposure Index of any point on the image.

To access the Region of Interest Tool:


1. Select an image.
2. Open the Image Viewer Screen.
3. At the Key Operator Preference Editor, select the Region of Interest button.
4. Select a point on the image.
The Region of Interest is the mean code value of exposure, indicated in a square area
drawn around the point you selected on the screen.
The display reads:
Mean:1229, 0.49 O.D.
Min:1045, 0.37 O.D.
Max:1384, 0.61 O.D.
St. Dev: 47.2, 0.04 O.D.
The first value in each row is code data, and the second value is optical density (OD).

301
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

The Key Operator can configure the size of the Region of Interest window in Display
Configuration.

Mean Code Value Usefulness


The mean code value provided in ROI information is useful for determining the selective
exposure in different sections of an anatomic or test image. Medical physicists may use the ROI
Tool for system calibration or QC testing.

302
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
Image Processing Controls
Brightness makes an image lighter or darker. Decreasing brightness can make low exposure
noise more visible.
Latitude controls the number of shades of gray visible in the image. Increasing the latitude
increases the number of gray levels, making blacks and whites less apparent. You may want to
increase the latitude if important anatomical information is in the black or white region of the
image and it cannot be visualized.
Increasing latitude:
o Increases the number of gray levels.
o Decreases the apparent D-max and D-min areas.
Detail Contrast controls the local contrast of medium sized structures such as joint spaces,
vertebral body spacings, and ribs in the image. Increasing detail contrast makes anatomical
features more pronounced.
Sharpness controls the visibility of finer structures such as bony trabeculae, lung markings, and
micro calcifications.
Noise controls the appearance of quantum noise in the image.
o Moving the slider control up decreases the effect of noise suppression.
As a Best Practice, evaluate the changes in Zoom mode before saving.

Detail Contrast, Sharpness, and Noise should be adjusted with careful inspection.

See also:
Changing Image Processing Preferences
What Is a Look?
Changing the Look
Using View Before and After

303
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
Using View Before and After
The Image Preference Editor Screen lets you compare the look of one image against another
and select the look you prefer.
1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration and then select Image
Processing Preferences.
2. Select an image.
3. Change Image Processing Preferences.
4. Select View Before and After and compare the results.
5. Select the look you prefer.

See also:
Changing Image Processing Preferences
Image Processing Controls
Using View Before and After
Changing the Look

304
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Image


Processing Preferences
Changing the Look
1. Select Change Look.
2. View the images provided. Use the Up or Down arrows to see all of the sample Looks. Consider
the characteristics described above.
3. Select Accept This Look if the sample image displays the image processing results you would
like to see for images with that View.
Navigational Buttons
Accept This Look Selects the View that is closest to the image processing
values you would like to see for that View. The selected
Look appears in the Image Processing Preference Editor.
Additional changes can be made at this time.
Previous Page/Next Selects the previous page of samples or the next page of
Page sample Views.
Cancel Cancels the selection.
Continue Without Saving.
Zoom Zooms the view to examine the image more closely.

See also:
What Is a Look?
Changing Image Processing Preferences
Image Processing Controls
Using View Before and After

305
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Configuring Destination Profiles

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Profile


Configuration
What Is a Destination Profile?
A Destination Profile is the set of destinations where images are sent. In the CR and DR
system, Image Routing is controlled by profiles. A destination profile has three components:
Name: the name or description of the profile.
Criteria: Cassette Size, Category (body part, projection), Department, Physician, Name, or
Machine Name.
Destinations: where the data is sent when the criteria matches.
The criteria fields are prioritized by the order they are listed on the Profile Configuration
Screen. You can change the order by using the second set of Up and Down arrows. Default
must always be last.
Category
Department Filter
Physician Name
Cassette Size Filter
Machine Name Filter
Output (for Multi-format Prints)
When an exam is routed, the information contained in the Patient Record is compared to the
information contained in the criteria fields of all defined profiles, similar to performing a query.
If the image matches more than one profile, the system assigns the first profile in the list that
matches all criteria.
Profiles can be assigned from Procedure Mapping or manually on the Patient Input Screen
and Select Destination Screen.
What Is the Default Profile?
A default profile is defined automatically by the system. It appears in the list of profile
destinations with an (*) asterisk next to the name. You can rename the default profile, but you
cannot change the criteria or delete it.
There must be only one default profile. If the data does not match the criteria for any of the
existing profiles, the system uses the default profile destination.

See also:
Destination Profile Configuration
Define multiple profiles with criteria so you can assign the datas destinations.

306
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Destination


Profile Configuration
Destination Profile Configuration
How do I add a new destination profile?
1. Select Add.
2. Enter the name of the profile.
3. Select the color that will identify this profile.
4. Select the filter (or filters) that will identify this profile. All profiles, except default, require a filter.
5. Select the destinations (printers and workstations) to send images to automatically.
6. Select the Mandatory check box if the image must reach that destination in order for the exam
to be considered complete. (Mandatory destinations are often archives.)

How do I edit an existing destination profile?


1. Select Turn Edit On.
2. Touch the profile name. Enter the name of the profile.
3. Touch the color field and select the color that will identify this profile.
4. Select the filter (or filters) that will identify this profile. Touch Clear to clear all filters for that
profile.
5. Select the destinations (printers and workstations) to send images with this profile to
automatically.
6. Select the Mandatory check box if the image must reach that destination in order for the exam
to be considered complete. (Mandatory destinations are often archives.)

Why can't I delete the default destination profile?


You can rename the default profile, but you cannot delete it or edit the filters for it. The default
profile is set by the system and is used to send images to destinations when all other criteria
fail.
There must always be one default profile.

How do I create a destination profile for images from a cassette size (CR Only)?
1. Select Turn Edit On.
2. Select the Destination Profile Name field and enter a name for the profile.
3. Select Clear for the Category and Department fields.
4. Touch the Cassette field and select the desired cassette size (CR Only).

307
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

5. Select the destinations.


6. Select Save Changes.
Images that meet this criterion (this cassette size) will go to these selected destinations
automatically.

Navigational Buttons
Turn Edit Edits the profile. Select this button to make changes to filters such as
On name, category, department, physician, cassette size.
Save Completes the action by writing changes to the local database.
Changes
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

See also:
What is a Destination Profile?
Configuring Destination Profiles with the Capture Link System

308
Key Operator Functions

View Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View


Configuration
View Configuration
What is a View?
A View is a pre-set image type that a radiographer can select to represent an exam. It is the
basic element in the digital image chain.
Views are associated with procedures on the Patient Input Screen and in optional Procedure
Mapping.
When you create a View, it appears on the Patient Input Screen as soon as you add it and
save it on the View Configuration Screen.

How do I create a View for a radiographer to select for an exam?


You can create a View by changing one or more of the following configurations:
Color Mask
Body Part Grid Suppression
Projection Noise
Suppression
Position Raw
Text Box True Size
View Name Tick Marks
Tutor Image Rotation
Skin Line Crop Type
Detection

For every View, there is an associated look and customized changes for each of the preference
editor controls. These can be seen, but not modified in the View Configuration Screen.
Brightness
Latitude
Sharpness
Contrast
Noise
To create a new View:
1. Reduce the number of Views in the list by selecting the Category radio buttons.

309
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

2. Select the check box of the View with a similar body part/projection you want to copy.
3. Select Copy Checked Views to copy the View settings and create a new View.
4. Select a Primary and Secondary Category to associate with the copy.
5. Select the new View name tabbed keyboard.
6. Select the radio button to display the parameters for the View (column selection).
7. Select the item that you want to change and enter a new value from the tabbed keyboard.
Repeat for each parameter you want to change.
8. Select Show View Details to edit all configurations of the View at once, or use the Column
Selection radio buttons to control which columns are displayed in the View list.
9. Select the Global Edit check box to apply the changes you make to every row of the Category
selected.
10. Select Save Changes.

How do I delete a View?


1. Select the check box next to the View(s) you want to delete.
2. Select Delete Checked Views to delete the selected View(s).
A confirmation dialog shows what Views will be deleted.
Before selecting Delete Checked Views, deselect all Views to make sure that no
additional Views are unexpectedly selected.
Views are erased from the system when you delete them from the View Configuration.
Deleting Views from View Category Management moves Views to the Uncategorized
category so they can be added back into a category later, if desired.

How do I change the sort order of the View List?


Select the heading item in the list.
The list order changes from ascending to descending.

How to assign default attributes to Unassigned Images


When an image is unassigned, it has no View attributes assigned to it. When you assign the
image, it still does not take on the attributes of the selected View. For example, the Text Box
would not appear, even though the assigned View has a text box as an attribute.
In the View Configuration Screen, you can assign attributes so that all unassigned images are
configured. To do this, select the Unassigned Default radio button and enable the following for
an unassigned default:
Color
View Name
Tutor Image

310
Key Operator Functions

Look Name
Grid Suppression
Noise Suppression
Raw
Skin Line Detection
Internal Text Box
Cropping Type
Surround Mask

How to view the Look name


To view the name of the Look that has been selected for the View:
1. Select the Brightness, Latitude, and Detail Contrast radio buttons.
2. View the name of the Look for each View. The Look name is the far right column on the screen.

How to change the default characteristics of an image


1. On the View Configuration Screen, place a check mark in the Select column next to the View
you want to modify.
2. Select the characteristic you want to modify, such as Rotation.
3. Select the preferred rotation from the pop-up menu.
4. Select Save Changes.

Navigational Buttons
Show View Details Lets you view the settings such as, Noise Suppression,
Detail Contrast, Latitude, Brightness, and Sharpness. You
can change settings such as, Grid Suppression, Raw,
Surround Mask, the indicator color, True-size, Tick Marks,
Skin line detection, and cropping type.
Select the tutor image to change the tutor image for the
View.
Select internal Text Box to add a text box configuration to
the View.
Select the tutor image to place the Text Box.
Select the External Text box setting to be at the bottom,
left, or off.
Delete Checked Views Selects the check box of the Views you want to delete and
then select Delete Checked Views.
A confirmation message appears. If the Views are

311
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

associated with a procedure, make sure that deleting them


will not affect Procedure Mapping.
Copy Checked Views Selects the check box of the View you want to copy and
then select Copy Checked Views. Rename the View and
modify it if desired. Select a Primary Category and a
Secondary Category where you want to place the View.
View Category Add or delete Primary, Secondary Categories, or Views.
Management Use the far right column arrows to move highlighted items
to arrange how the Regions, Exams, and Views display.
The order of the items in the column will display left to right,
top to bottom at the Patient Input Screen.
Check All Selects all check boxes. One row is always selected.
Uncheck All Removes the check mark from all check boxes.
Save Changes Completes the action by writing changes to the local
database.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main
Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

Tab Controls
Keyboard Activates when you select a button. The button becomes
active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.
Color Allows you to choose the colors of the buttons from over
200 individual colors.
Color Palette Provides a full color palette of blended hues.
Body Part* Provides three tabs containing all body parts in use to
create a View.
Projection* Provides from three tabs containing all projections in use to
create a View.
Position* Provides all positions in use to create a View.
Flip/Rotate Flips or rotates, and lets you select the degree.
Tutor Image Selects the graphic tutor image that represents the View.
Both Gold and silhouette images are available.

* You can use the virtual alphanumeric keyboard to change body part, projection, or position.
After saving, the new item appears in the appropriate keyboard.

See also:
What Is a SNOMED Code?
Managing View Categories

312
Key Operator Functions

Changing View Configuration Details

313
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View


Configuration
Configuring Surround Mask Enlargement
Surround Mask Enlargement allows the auto mask to pull back off the collimated area in order
to show the actual collimation. The increments are in centimeters. It is recommended to use 2-3
cm. Using more than this can create a black border to appear inside the image area.
To apply the Surround Mask Enlargement:
1. From the Main Menu, select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View
Configuration.
2. Select the fourth radio button (under Mask).
3. For a specific View, enter the value for the mask enlargement, from 0 to 12 mm.
4. To change all Views, select Global Edit to apply the mask enlargement to all Views.
This configuration changes the appearance of the mask on all images you have selected.
Surround Mask Enlargement Appearance
Surround Mask Enlargement allows the auto mask to pull back off the collimated area in order
to show the actual collimation.

See also:

314
Key Operator Functions

Using the Surround Mask Tab


Applying Automatic Masking
Applying Manual Masking

315
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View


Configuration
Changing View Configuration Attributes
You can view and/or change the following attributes which make up each View: See the View
Configuration Details Screen for a list of items that make up each View.
When the Global Edit Mode box is checked, any changes apply to all of the Views for the
category selected.
Changing the View name will not change the image processing. The image processing for the
View is determined by the way the View is set up in the Image Processing Preference Editor.
To change the Attributes of a View:
1. Select a View.
2. Select the desired attributes (View Name, Rotation, Tutor Image, etc.)
3. Select Save Changes.
A summary of the View's attributes are located by selecting Show View Details where you can.
Edit the attributes of a single View.
View the standard naming and encoding convention (SNM3 Codes) for identifying body part,
position, and orientation in the DICOM header.
Navigation Buttons
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.

See also:
View Configuration
Managing View Categories
What Is a SNOMED Code

316
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View


Configuration > View Category Management
Managing View Categories
You can Add or Delete Primary Categories, Secondary Categories, or Views.
Use the far right column arrows to move highlighted items and arrange the way the Regions,
Exams, and Views display.
The items in the column will display left to right, top to bottom, at the Patient Input Screen.
1. Select a Primary Category.
The category name highlights so that you can edit it. The associated Secondary Category
and views appear in the second and third columns.
2. Edit the category or select Add to save it and start a new category.
3. Select a color for the Primary Category from the keyboard.
4. Select a Secondary Category and color.
5. Add or delete the views as appropriate.
6. Select Save Changes.

See also:
What Is a SNOMED Code
Changing View Configuration Details
View Configuration

317
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > View


Configuration > Show View Details
What Is a SNOMED Code
A SNOMED (SNM3) code is a coded sequence of numbers that identifies attributes of a view.
SNOMED values are pre-configured by Carestream Health. They are a standard naming and
encoding convention for identifying body part, position, and orientation in the DICOM header.
Each view contains SNOMED codes for body part, position, and projection.
The information typically includes:
Body Part
Projection
Laterality
Study Instance UID
Series Instance UID (all images in the same series or different series)
Image Instance Number or Image Acquisition Number

See also:
Changing View Configuration Details

318
Key Operator Functions

Trauma Default Configuration

Trauma Defaults Configuration


Trauma is configured by the Key Operator to provide a fast source of patient information to use
when:
Patient information is not available.
You need to complete an exam rapidly when a patient's identity may not be known.
To set up and configure trauma defaults:
1. Select New Tab.
2. Select the tab size based on the number of items you want in the list.
3. Select a button and enter the name in edit mode.
4. Select the Color Tab and select a color.
5. Select Save Changes.
6. Select Change Trauma Defaults.
The Trauma Defaults [Patient Name] displays. See Entering or Changing Trauma Exam
Data
7. Enter the desired information, such as Priority, Gender, Tech ID, etc.
8. Select Save Changes.
9. Select Back to pre-configure more Trauma buttons.
or
Select Main Menu > Study Data > Trauma to review the newly created Trauma buttons.
You cannot move a button from one tab to another.
You can enter five tabs of 40 entries, or 200 items per list.
Navigation Buttons
Change Trauma Opens the Patient Data form on the Patient Input Screen. Lets
Defaults you edit the default patient data for the selected trauma button.
Enter the required data that represents this default ID.
New Tab Selects the matrix size based on the number of items you will
have in your list. Choose from 4 x 5, 5 x 5, 6 x 5, 7 x 5, 8 x 5.
You can enter up to five tabs of data per list.
Delete Tab Deletes the tab of information from the list. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion. There is no recovery from
deleting a tab.
Show Button Displays the button in the list in the interface. Toggles to Hide
Button.
Hide Button Hides the button display on the interface. Toggles to Show
Button.

319
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Save Changes Saves the change to the local database.


Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

Changing Button Colors or Moving Buttons on a Tab


Use the Tab Controls that appear at the bottom of the screen:
Tab Controls
Keyboard Activates the keyboard when you touch a button. The button
becomes active for editing. Type the information from the virtual
keyboard.
Color Selects the colors of the buttons from over 200 individual colors.
Select the color you desire.
Color Palette Selects from a full color palette of blended hues.
Move Moves the button to another position on the tab. "Move" does not
let you move the button to another tab.

See also:
Changing Trauma Defaults
Hiding Trauma Defaults
Procedure Mapping Configuration

320
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Trauma


Defaults
Entering or Changing Trauma Exam Data
The Change Trauma Defaults button associates a default patient record with the Trauma
Default button previously named.
To create or edit the patient record information for the Trauma button:
1. Select the Change Trauma Defaults button.
2. Enter default values for the fields of interest for the selected Trauma exam.
3. Use the Unique Number button to assign a serial number of 1 to 4 digits to selected fields.
For example:
1. In the Patient Last Name field, enter Doe.
2. Select Unique Number 2 digits.
The result is a series of Trauma Patient names: Doe 01, Doe 02, Doe 03, etc.
In the Patient ID field
Select Unique Number 4.
The system identifies the patient as 0001, 0002, 0003, etc.
4. Use the Procedure Name field or Procedure Code field to assign a procedure to the trauma
default button if the Procedure Mapping option has been enabled.
5. Select Save Changes.
To prevent Trauma exams from being delivered to Mandatory Destinations, make sure you
leave one of the Required for Delivery fields blank
Tab Controls
Keyboard The keyboard becomes active when you select a field. The field
becomes active for editing. Type the information from the keyboard.
Unique Lets you assign a unique number to the Patient Name fields, the
Number Patient ID field, or the Accession Number field. This ensures that no
matter how often this Trauma ID is used, the Patient ID will be
unique.

See also:
Trauma Defaults Configuration
Hiding Trauma Defaults

321
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Hiding Trauma Exam Buttons


You can configure trauma exam buttons to not show on the Trauma Defaults list.
To hide a trauma exam Button:
1. From the Trauma Defaults Screen, select a trauma exam button, such as cranium.
2. Select Hide Button.
3. Select Save Changes.
To restore a Trauma exam button:
1. From the Trauma Defaults Screen, select a trauma exam button, such as cranium.
2. Select Show Button.
3. Select Save Changes.

See also:
Trauma Defaults Configuration
Changing Trauma Defaults

322
Key Operator Functions

Statistics

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Technologist Statistics


Viewing Radiographer's Statistics
View all radiographer's statistics, based on Tech ID, that are compiled from the KODAK
DIRECTVIEW Reject Analysis Software.
Techs View all of the statistics for a particular radiographer.
Views View all of the statistics for all of the views for the selected radiographer.
Image View all of the statistics for all of the images done by the selected
List radiographer with the selected view.
View each of the images for the selected radiographer.
How do I change the order of the list?
Select the header bar of the Tech, Views, or Image List window. You can sort in any column. A
triangle appears over the column that is being sorted and indicates ascending or descending
order.

Where does the image list come from?


The Image List data contains information for the past year. Only those images that still exist on
the System can be viewed. To view the images, select the magnifying glass.
The images are delivered images.

How do I save the data?


Save all statistics by downloading them to a removable USB drive, hard drive, or floppy diskette.

See also:
Downloading Statistics

Navigational Buttons
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns you to the previous screen.

323
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Destination Summary


Statistics
Viewing Destination Summary Statistics
Destination Summary Statistics updates the status of the destinations listed and the status of
the devices as you go to the screen.
Lets you check the status of destinations if you are getting a repeated failed delivery.
Identifies problem destinations quickly.
Navigation Buttons
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.

324
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Flagged Image List


Viewing the Flagged Image List
The Flagged Image List lets you:
Locate flagged images quickly.
Examine images closely.
Harvest images for with or without private health information (PHI).
Unflag images.
This action permanently deletes the image.
Navigation Buttons
Clear Removes all data entered in the search fields.
Fields
Main Exits the current screen and returns to the system main menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.
Quick Shutdown lets you safely shut down the machine.
Menu
Logout logs you off the system.

325
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Download Statistics


Downloading Statistics
Download Statistics lets you:
Log in to multiple CR Systems, remove and retrieve all statistics.
Select a date range and download all statistics to a spreadsheet for data management.
Add or delete device IP addresses in the system from which to download statistics.
To download statistics:
1. Select the Add Device IP Address button.
2. Enter the IP addresses of the devices you want to get statistics for and select the devices.
3. Enter the from/to date range.
4. Select Retrieve Statistics.
5. Select Save file as. This is the location where the statistics should be saved.
Navigation Buttons
Delete Device IP Deletes the row that is currently selected.
Address
Select/Unselect All A tool to quickly get statistics from multiple devices.
Save Changes Updates the IP address list so that it is not necessary to
type it again. It does not retrieve statistics.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system
Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.
Ping Machines If the connection is good, the light appears green. If there
is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.

See also:
Exporting Data

326
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Statis Cassette Statistics


Cassette Statistics
Cassette Statistics lets you view the performance of a cassette and identify possible problems
with cassettes.
The Cassette ID column identifies the cassette. The screen also shows the number of scans for
each cassette, how many images were accepted or rejected, and the percent rejected for each
cassette ID.
The total of each column appears at the bottom of the screen.
You can use this information to remove a cassette from service if necessary.

327
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Erase Statistics


Erase Cycles
The Erase Cycles Screen tracks the number of scans/erases done with each pair of lamps.
The Actuation Count displays the total scans on the system.
The Batch Erase Count displays the number of cassettes that have been erased by going into
the Batch Erase Mode (825/850/975 CR System) or Manual Erase Mode (Classic/Elite CR
System). This number is separate from the actuation count.

You can use this screen to identify a problem with the erase lamp assembly if the erase lamps
are burning out sooner than expected.

328
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Statistics > Download Statistics


Exporting Data
With the optional Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software, you can retrieve data
from multiple CR or DR Systems, download it to a PC, and analyze it using pre-configured
templates for MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 or higher. The interactive reports can be configured,
rearranged, analyzed, saved, and appended as you choose.
To set-up to export data from several machines:
This feature is best operated from an office computer that is connected to the CR network using
the Remote Key Operator function. The following items must be installed on a computer with
access to the network on which the CR machines are connected:
Remote Access Software
Templates CD
MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 or higher (not provided)
The CR devices from which data must be obtained must have Administrative Analysis and
Reporting Software activated on the System.
1. At the Remote Key Operator, open MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER.
2. In the address window, enter the IP address of one machine you choose to be the host
machine.
The host will get the data from all other machines (for example: http://192.168.1.1).
3. To the end of the IP address, add :56333/
For example, a complete entry would look like this: http://192.168.1.1:56333/
4. Log in as a Key Operator at the Remote Key Operator computer.
5. Select Key Operator Functions >Statistics >Download Statistics.
6. At the Download Statistics Screen, select Add Device IP Address.
7. Add the IP address of all of the Consoles from which you want to collect data.
8. Select Save Changes.
9. Select the check box for the devices you want to get information from.
10. Enter the From Date and To Date to determine the date range.
11. Select Retrieve Statistics.
12. Choose one of the following:
Stats
TQT Stats
13. Select View statistics or Save File As.
14. Select a drive or the WINDOWS desktop.
15. Select New Folder.
16. Name the folder.

329
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

17. Select Save.


18. Highlight the file in the list.
19. Select the Select button. This returns you to the Download Statistics Screen.
20. Open the CR Admin Reporting Template from the Administrative Analysis and Reporting
Software CD.
21. Save to the desktop of the Remote Key Operator.
22. Open the template.
23. At the prompt, select Enable Macros.
24. Select Import Data from the worksheet.
25. Select the EXCEL spreadsheet saved to a drive or on the desktop.
26. Select Yes to overwrite the existing record.

330
Key Operator Functions

Text Box Configuration

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Configurable Text Box Menu
Configuring Text Boxes
Configurable Text Box Options
Editing a Text Box
Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box
Selecting a Default Multi-Format Text Box
Using a Multi-Format Image Internal Text Box
Using a Multi-Format Image External Text Box
Using a Multi-Format Page External Text Box
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
Using the Single Image External Text Box

331
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Configuring Text Boxes
Selecting a Text Box
Editing a Text Box
Selecting a Default Multi-Format Text Box
Configurable Text Box

332
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on the length of the data field and
the size of the font.
The Multi-format Image Internal Text Box appears inside each image area on a multi-format
print.
Print on any printer that supports multi-format printing.
Select this text box when you want to label each individual image and/or want to print True-size.
Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Editing a Text Box
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box

333
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Selecting an Internal or an External Text Box


To select the appropriate Text Box, consider the type of image area that is displayed. You can
make the selection or the Key Operator can select a default Text Box for any given View.
Select the Internal Text Box when you want the information to appear within the image and
when you must be able to print to any printer. The Text Box can be moved to any corner or any
inside edge to avoid covering any anatomy.
Select the External Text Box when you want to position the label outside the image area. This
Text Box shrinks the image and affects True-size printing.
The Key Operator configures a Text Box to automatically fill in with data, such as Hospital
Name, Exposure Index, or View.

334
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
The Internal Text Box displays information about the patient, exam, and image and is
positioned inside the image area on one of the four sides of the image.
The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on the length of the data fields and
the size of the font.
You can move the text box to any corner or any inside edge to avoid covering anatomy.
You can print an Internal Text Box on any printer. Use an Internal Text Box when you want to
print True-size.
Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Editing a Text Box
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box
Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu

335
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
The text box can be up to 160 mm wide. Its content depends on length of data fields and the
size of the font selected.

The Multi-format Image Internal Text Box appears inside each image area on a multi-format
print.

Print it on any printer that supports multi-format printing.


Select this text box when you want to label each individual image and/or want to print True-size.
Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Editing a Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
Using the Single Image External Text Box
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box

336
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box
The text box can hold up to 120 characters and is limited to one line.

Use this text box when you want the information to fall outside a multi-format image.

Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Editing a Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu
Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box

337
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box
Because certain image-specific data may not be identical for every image on a multi-format
print, these fields should be omitted from the Multi-format Page External Text Box. When
creating a Multi-format Page External Text box, include only DICOM fields with values that will
always be identical for all of the included images. Failure to do so will result in fields that display
a question mark (?).
Select the Multi-format Page External Text Box when you want the text label to:
o Appear outside the image area on a Multi-format print.
o Extend across the page under the images.
The text box can be up to 120 characters wide and is limited to two lines.

Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Editing a Text Box
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box
Editing a Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu

338
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Using a Single Image External Text Box
The External Text Box positions the information outside the image area; therefore, it never
interferes with anatomy. However, the box takes up space on the film, and the system crops
additional image data compared with printing without an External Text Box. Thus, an External
Text Box affects True-size printing.
This text box can be up to 120 characters wide.

Text boxes appear on the print only. They do not appear when the image is viewed on a
workstation.

See also:
Editing a Text Box
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
Using a Single Image Internal Text Box
Using the Single Image Internal Text Box
Using a Multi-format Page External Text Box
Using a Multi-format Image External Text Box
Using a Multi-format Image Internal Text Box
Configurable Text Box Menu

339
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Selecting a Default Multi-format Text Box
1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select System Configuration and select Configurable
Text Boxes.
2. Select Configurable Text Box Options.
3. Select each check box corresponding with the text boxes) you want as a possible default for
multi-format printing.
The radiographer can select other text box formats on the Multi-Format Configuration Screen.

See also:
Editing a Text Box

340
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Boxes
Editing a Text Box
At the top of each Text Box Editor screen is a template for the text box you have selected.
Data fields are represented by question marks: ???????????????
The maximum width and height of the text box are listed in the background next to the sample
box.
How do I activate the next or prior available field?
Select a field. The question marks (??????????) should be highlighted.
Or, select the Move Next and Move Prior buttons.

How do I edit the fields in the text box?


1. Select a field you would like to change.
The question marks (???????????) should be highlighted.
2. Select the DICOM Field box.
3. Assign a label that comes before the DICOM value.
4. Select Assign Field.
The new DICOM name and tag are added for you.
Optional: If a field is optional and it does not have a value, then the field is removed from the
text box. If all of the fields on a line are optional and blank, then the text box will get shorter.
This is useful if you want to include a field such as Image Comments in the text box when it
has a value, but you do not want to make the text box unnecessarily large (for example, for the
time when there are no comments).

How do I add a field?


1. Select a field to use as a reference point.
The question marks (???????????) should be highlighted.
2. Select New Field Before or New Field After.
A field of one character appears before or after your selection.
3. Select the Field Length box.
4. Enter the desired length of the field from the keyboard.
5. Select the DICOM Field box.
6. Select a DICOM Field Name.
7. Select Assign Field.

341
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

8. Select the Text Field Label box.


9. Assign a label that comes before the DICOM value.
How do I add a row if the buttons are gray?
If you have the maximum number of rows, the Add Row buttons will not be active.
Delete an unnecessary field to add a row, or select a different text box.

Can I reset the text box after I have changed it?


Select Restore Small Default or Restore Large Default to return the text box to it's minimum
or maximum configuration.
For Multi-format Image Internal and Page External Text Box editors, select Restore Factory
Default.

How are dates and times recorded in the system?


The DICOM specification is as follows:
Study DateDICOM tag (0008,0020): The date the study started.
Study TimeDICOM tag (0008,0030): The time the study started.
Image DateDICOM tag (0008,0023) Content Date: The date the image pixel data creation
started. Required if the image is part of a series in which the images are temporally related.
Image TimeDICOM tag (0008,0033): The time the image pixel data creation started.
Required if the image is part of a series in which the images are temporally related.
The system sets these values to be the date and time the image record was created in the
database.

What are the Text Box Editing Controls?


Optional Designates the selected field as optional.
New Field Before Creates a new field before the current selected field,
designated by question marks: ????????????????
New Field After Creates a new field after the current selected field.
Delete Field Deletes the current selected field.
Move Next Moves the current selected field to the next position.
New Row Above Adds a new row above the selected field. This field is not
active in Single Image Internal or Multi-format Image External
Text Box configuration.
New Row Below Adds a new row below the selected field. This field is not
active in Single Image Internal or Multi-format Image External
Text Box configuration.

342
Key Operator Functions

Move Prior Moves the current selected field to the previous position.
Restore Small Returns the text box to the small default configuration.
Default
Restore Large Returns the text box to the large default configuration.
Default
DICOM Field Select the DICOM Field. From the Keyboard, select Show
most common DICOM fields only to reduce the size of the
list. Select the field. Select the field you want to change and
select Assign Field.
DICOM Tag Displays the DICOM Tag associated with the DICOM Field.
Assign Field After selecting a field in the text box, select a field from the
DICOM field list and select Assign Field. The new field
appears in the text box.
Text Field Label Enter a label for the field with the keyboard.
Field Length Enter the maximum length of the selected field. Keep the font
size in mind.
Font Size Enter the font size for the selected field with the keypad and
select Enter.
Justification Place the text Left, Right, or Center within the selected field.
Restore Factory Return Multi-format Image Internal and Page External text
Default boxes to their original format.

343
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Configurable


Text Box Menu > Configurable Text Box Options
Configurable Text Box Options
Select the check box of each option you want to be available in your system. You may choose
as many formats as you wish.
Use Transparent background for Internal Text Boxes.
The text appears directly on the background of the image.
Use the Image Internal Text Box in Multi-format Images.
Use the Image External Text Box in Multi-format Images.
Use the Page External Text Box in Multi-Format Images.
Use Transparent background for Text Markers.

See also:
Using a Multi-Format Image Internal Text Box
Using a Multi-Format Image External Text Box
Using a Multi-Format Page External Text Box

344
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > Manage Patient Exam Records


Managing Patient Exam Records
To delete a patient record:
1. Enter the search criteria such as Accession Number, Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Patient
First Name.
2. Select Find Study.
3. Select the Delete box next to the record to be deleted.
4. Select the Delete Patients button at the bottom of the screen to remove the patient records
from the system.
To delete all patient records:
Select Delete All Patients from the Manage Patient Exam Records query page to delete all
patients from the system.
There is no recovery from this command. It deletes even records that have been
Protected.
To prevent selected patient records from being erased when the hard drive fills up:
1. Enter the search criteria such as Accession Number, Patient ID, Patient Last Name, Patient
First Name.
2. Select Find Study.
3. For the selected study, check the box labeled Protected.
4. After marking all the patients to be protected, select the Protect Patients button at the bottom
of the screen.
5. These studies are protected from removal when the hard drive fills up. These studies are not
protected from the Delete All Studies action.
Names and exams that have an Available, Pending Delivery, or Failed Delivery status cannot
be deleted until they are corrected.
Protected prevents the study from being deleted by the Disk Manager when the hard disk fills
up. These studies are not protected from the Delete All Studies action.
Navigational Controls
Clear All Removes all the information entered in the search criteria fields.
Fields
Delete All Deletes all patient information on the system.
Patients
Find Study Locates the study that matches the criteria entered.
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

345
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Option Activation


Register and Activate Options
The Key Operator can add or remove purchased options from the Key Operator Functions >
Option Registration Screen.
Activating an Option
You will need a set of Activation Codes from Carestream Health, Inc.
1. Go to Key Operator Functions > Option Registration Screen.
This screen displays all of the available options for that system.
2. Enter all Activation Codes one at a time into the text box from the keyboard or by using a bar-
code reader. If the code is entered manually, then the Add Code button adds the code to the list
of Codes to the right. If you use the bar-code reader, the code is automatically added to the list.
When an option code is entered and activated from this list, the features and benefits of that
option become temporarily available on the system. The options stay active for several
days.
4. Insert any USB drive into the System.
5. Select the Export Request button.
6. Select the USB drive as the destination directory for the Activation file. The file named
OptionActivationRequest.xml is saved to the USB drive.
7. From a personal computer, e-mail the OptionActivationRequest.xml file to
activation@carestreamhealth.com.
An Activation File is automatically e-mailed back to the sender. This file is a key that
matches the hardware and software that identifies your system. The file cannot be used with
any other device.
8. Place the Activation File on the USB drive.
9. Insert the USB drive into the System.
10. From the Key Operator > Option Registration Screen, select the Import Activation file.
11. Select the source directory for the Activation File (USB drive).
The Activation File is copied to the local hard drive.
The system verifies the signature and activates the options as specified in the Activation
File.

Sending the Incorrect Code


If you type an Activation Code incorrectly, the system will recognize the error. The text box will
not clear and an error message will be displayed.
This prevents you from sending incorrectly entered Activation Codes.

No E-mail Available

346
Key Operator Functions

If there is no access to e-mail or the network is down, the options stay active for several days to
give you time to send the Option Activation Request and retrieve the Activation File from a
remote computer.

Navigational Buttons
Activate Makes the selected option immediately available in the system.
Option
Main Menu Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Back Returns to the previous screen.

347
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Scanner


Options
Scanner Options
Scanner Options lets you select and enable or disable the Reduced Border Option.
To enable Reduced Border, select the check box on the screen and select Save Changes.

What is Reduced Border?


Images on 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm cassettes are captured with pixel sizes of 171 microns
rather than 168 microns. The scanned image area increases slightly, producing borders smaller
than those produced on other systems.

348
Key Operator Functions

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > CSA Log


Viewer
CSA Log Viewer
The CISCO Security Agent (CSA) feature is a tool that permits the Key Operator to review the
event log file created on the modality. The CSA Log Viewer is displayed only in English.
The Cisco Security Agent provides protection against malware attacks. CSA intercepts and
prevents system activities not specifically authorized by the System Software.
CSA prevents new intrusions by understanding the rules of inappropriate or unacceptable
behavior for all applications.
When an application attempts an operation, the CSA checks the operation against the
application's security policy and determines if the application should continue and if the request
should be logged.
Because protection is based on blocking malicious behavior, the default policies stop both
known and unknown attacks without needing updates.

349
Remote Devices
Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device
Configuration
Configuring Remote Devices
For the Key Operator to configure a Remote Operations Panel (ROP):
At each CR System:
1. Select New Device.
Key Operator: Enter the IP address of the ROP.
Key Operator: Select Remote Operations Panel as the device type.
Key Operator: Repeat these steps for all Remote Operations Panels.
2. Select Edit ROP Links.
3. Enter the IP address of every CR System that will be linked to the ROP.
4. Select Save to All.
This adds all CR links to each ROP that you added in steps 2-4.
5. Select Delete Device to remove a device from the CR System.
At each ROP:
The initial link from the ROP to the CR System must have already been done by a qualified
installer.
1. Select the link to the CR System on which you just made changes.
2. Once the ROP is linked, select Key Operator Functions.
3. Select Fetch ROP Links.
This adds the new links you added in step 3 above.
4. Select the Quick Menu and select ROP Links to display the new links.
This button does not exist at the CR System or the ROP.
Navigational Buttons
Edit ROP Changes the configuration of the existing communication links between
Links ROPs and other devices. Takes you to the ROP Links Configuration
Screen.
Ping Lets you ping selected devices to verify their connection. If the ping is
Devices successful, a green indicator appears in the left corner of the table. If
there is no connection, the indicator turns red.
New Lets you add a new IP address.
Device
Delete Lets you delete a device.

351
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Device
Main Exits the current screen and returns you to the system Main Menu.
Menu
Back Returns to the previous screen.

352
Remote Devices

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device


Configuration
Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System
1. At a Modality, from the Main Menu, select Key Operator Functions > System Configuration
> Remote Device Configuration.
2. Enter the IP address of the remote computer.
3. Select Remote Access Software for the Device Type.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Follow the instructions to install Remote Access Software on an appropriate remote computer.
6. Select INTERNET EXPLORER at the remote computer and enter the IP address of the
Modality.
7. Add:56333/ to the end of the IP address.
Example: http://192.168.1.1:56333/
8. At the firewall dialog, select Unblock.
At the Logon Screen:
Log in as a Key Operator to access Remote Key Operator Functions.
Log on as a Security Administrator to access Remote Security Administrator Functions.
Log on as a Technologist to access the Remote Patient Data Entry Screen. (The Tech Log
on button can be used if available.)

You must always enter :56333/ at the end of the IP address when setting up a remote function.
To locate your Systems IP address, from the Main Menu, select Utilities, and select the
System Status Screen.

See also:
Remote Workstation Options
Easy to Use Remote Access Software

353
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device


Configuration
Remote Workstation Options
Remote Access Software is a customer-installed software that lets you set up and perform
selected CR functions from a remote computer. These functions include:
Remote Key Operator
Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES)
Remote Security Administrator
To verify the system requirements for Remote Access Software:
The system requirements are:
MICROSOFT WINDOWS XP Professional Operating System
INTERNET EXPLORER V 6.0 or higher
1.4 GHz Pentium M or higher processor
512 MB Ram (1 GB Recommended)
32 bit Color Monitor
1280 x 1024 monitor display
To determine the differences between the remote computer and the CR System:
When you log in remotely, the Main Menu will look different. The Study Data menu and the
Image Review menu will not be available.
The items you can access, depending on password, are described below:
Remote Key Operator Manage Patient Exam Records (delete records without
images)
Statistics (cannot view rejected images)
System Configuration (reduced features)
Backup & Restore (same as CR System)
Option Registration (same as CR System)
Remote Patient Data Entry Access to the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate
System the Work List.
Remote Security Access to all Security Administrator Functions.
Administrator

See also:
Exporting Data
Configuring Remote Devices
Setting Up Remote Access

354
Remote Devices

Remote Workstation Options

355
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > System Configuration > Remote Device


Configuration
Easy to Use Remote Access Software
Once you have set up Remote Access Software, you can create a shortcut to Remote
Access Software and place it on your desktop for easy access.
To create the shortcut:
1. Open MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER.
2. With the address displayed, click and drag the MICROSOFT INTERNET EXPLORER icon to
your desktop.
3. Right-click the shortcut to rename it.
4. Double-click the shortcut to launch the remote connection.

See also:
Configuring Remote Devices
Setting Up Remote Access
Remote Workstation Options

356
Remote Devices

ROP Links Configuration


ROP Links Configuration lets you enter the IP address of a Remote Operations Panel and set
it up for communication with CR Systems. ROP Links is accessed from the Remote Device
Configuration Screen.
To enter a remote device:
1. Select the New Device button. The virtual keypad appears.
2. Enter the IP address of the remote device.
3. Select Edit ROP Links. The ROP Links Configuration Screen appears.
4. Select Add ROP Link to add the IP address of a CR System. An IP address must have the
format of X.X.X.X where X is a number between 0 and 255.
The CR Systems listed on the ROP Links Configuration Screen appear on the ROP Links
Screen on the Remote Operations Panel.
5. Select Delete ROP Link to remove a CR System from the ROP Links Configuration Screen
and the ROP Links list.
6. Select Save Changes or Save to All.

357
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Key Operator Functions > Remote Devices


Administrative Analysis and Reporting Feature
The CR Administrative Reporting Templates workbook replaces all previous versions. To
transfer data from previous versions of the workbook to the new workbook, do the following:
1. Open new workbook file on your computer.
2. Select Import Data.
3. Navigate to the data contained in the previous workbook.
4. Select Open and proceed with instructions to Overwrite or Append.
The EXCEL workbooks contain report templates for use with the Administrative Analysis and
Reporting Feature of KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. Select the software option and the
appropriate workbook for the data you want to report:

Required Software Workbook Purpose


Option
DIRECTVIEW Software CR Admin Reporting Analyze and report
V 5.1 Templates general information
about CR Operations.
DIRECTVIEW Total CR Admin Reporting Analyze and report TQT
Quality Tool (TQT) TQT data.

The CR Admin Reporting TQT workbook contains reports designed for the structure and content
of the Total Quality Tool Software option only. Do not use this workbook for other reports.

358
Remote Patient Data Entry System
Remote Patient Data Entry System (RPDES)
Remote Patient Data Entry Software is a software option for entering patient data at a
workstation. It is installed on the CR System and allows communication between a customer-
supplied computer workstation and the CR System.
If the Remote Patient Data Entry option has been enabled, the Remote Access Software lets
you access the Patient Input Screen to pre-populate the Work List. A radiographer-level
password is required when logging into the CR from the customer PC.
A RPDES must have a fixed IP address. If the PC is configured to use DHCP (dynamic IP
address assignment on boot),or the link with the CR System may be lost when the PC is
rebooted.
Setting up the RPDES at the CR
1. Load the Remote Access Software onto the customer's computer (see Remote Workstation
Options section).
2. Follow the steps in Setting Up Remote Access to the CR or DR System.
Entering Patient Information using the RPDES:
The Remote Patient Data Entry System saves time by letting you input patient information from
a remote location.
1. Log on into the CR remotely.
2. Select the Remote Patient Data Entry menu bar.
3. Enter the patient information.
4. Select Save Changes.
This clears all the fields and lets you enter the next patient record.
You can retrieve the patient information at the CR System.

359
Local User Interface
Local User Interface Main Menu
The Local User Interface is available only with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Classic and Elite CR
Systems. It is accessed through the LCD display on the top of the machine.
The menu is dynamic. The menu choices may appear in the following order, or a different order
depending on the directional arrows you choose.
To use the Local User Interface Menu:
Select the icon on the Classic or Elite System to access the menu selections. The functions are
listed in the table below.
Utilities Volume Settings Button Click
Control the volume of the Alarms
following settings: Bar-Code Read
The response of selecting Cassette Loaded
Touch the icon on the a button on the remote
Classic or Elite System interface.
to access the Utilities
The sound of alarms on
menu.
the CR System.
The sound of the Bar-
Code Scanner.
The sound that occurs
when you place a
cassette in the cassette
feed slot and it is ready to
scan.

Scanner Information Scan Count


Scan Count is a Laser Hours
consecutive count of Erase Lamp Status
scans on the machine.
Laser Hours is a
consecutive count of the
hours the laser has
operated.
Erase Lamp Status
gives a picture of the
current performance of
each pair of erase lamps
in the machine.
Display Settings Brightness
BrightnessUse the +

361
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

and - buttons to control Sleep


the brightness of the
display on the interface.
SleepSelect the
interval for the interface to
be active without being
accessed.

Scan Mode High Speed


Scan Modes are unique to Reduced Border
the Classic and Elite CR Standard Speed
Systems. Scan Modes
affect large cassettes such
as 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43
cm.

There are three scan modes


you can set from the Local
User Interface (not the
Console):

Standard Speed Mode


Standard Resolution, High
Resolution, Enhanced
Resolution.
High Speed Mode
Standard Resolution, High
Resolution, Enhanced
Resolution.
Reduced BorderImages
on 35 x 35 and 35 x 43 cm
cassettes are captured with
pixel sizes of 171 microns
rather than 168 microns.
The scanned image area
increases slightly, producing
borders smaller than those
produced on other systems.
Active Console IP address
Provides the name and IP
address of the Classic or
Elite System currently in
communication with the
Console.

362
Local User Interface

System Recovery Release Cassette


Touch this button to release Cassette Jam
a jammed cassette in the
Classic or Elite System.
Erase Cassettes Cassette will be
Erased
Insert the cassette. Erasing
begins automatically.
The phosphor screen in the
cassette is erased and
released.

363
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Volume Settings Tab


The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Classic and Elite Systems have a local user interface built into
the top of the machine.
You can set the volume for the following signals by selecting the symbol:

Button Click Alarms

Bar-Code Cassette
Read Loaded

364
Long-Length Imaging
Long-Length Imaging Menu
Acquiring Images
Performing a Long-Length Exam
Optimizing a Long-Length Exam
Entering Data for an LLI Exam
Determining the SID
LLI Techniques
Scanning LLI Images on Capture Link System
Assigning and Unassigning LLI Images
CR Long-Length Grid Ratio
Tips for Optimizing LLI Image Quality
Composite Images
Printing Long-Length Images
Viewing Long-Length Images
No Composite Image
Images are Stitched Incorrectly
Distorted Composite Image

365
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Acquiring Images
Long-Length Imaging

Performing a Long-Length Exam


1. Enter Patient data into the CR Modality the same way you would for a standard study.
2. Select a View or a Procedure.
3. Bar-code one of the cassettes used in the study.
4. Select Save Changes.
5. Select the number of Long-length Cassettes used.
6. Bar-code the remaining cassettes.
You can override the default SID setting before processing the cassettes in the CR System
by selecting one of the thumbnails and then the More Image Data Tab. There may be a
distortion at the seam line of the composite image if the SID used is not within plus or minus
1 cm of the actual SID used.
When all of the cassettes have been processed in the CR System, the composite image will
automatically begin to process.
Five image icons always appear for each long-length vertical exposure regardless of the
number of cassettes used. If there are three icons representing cassettes 2, 3, and 4, the last is
the composite image. The fifth cassette icon remains as a placeholder if it is not used.
Three image icons always appear for each portable long-length exposure. For example, three
icons would represent images 1, 2, and the stitched image.

The composite image is represented by the fifth image placeholder for the Vertical Cassettes
and the third image placeholder for the Portable Cassette. The number of the cassettes used in
the exposure appears on this image.
The SID for the Portable Long-Length Cassette is determined automatically by the Position field
selection on the Patient Input Screen (Supine or Erect). The defaults for these positions are
set by the Key Operator. The radiographer can override this setting for the combined image
body part and projection as desired from the More Image Data button on the Patient Input
Screen.
To use your CR System for long-length imaging, a Carestream Health Representative must
install KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System Software Version 5.1 or higher.

See also:
Optimizing a Long-Length Exam
Entering Data for an LLI Exam
Determining the SID
Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images
CR Long-Length Grid Ratio

366
Long-Length Imaging

Long-Length Imaging

Optimizing a Long-Length Exam


What kind of grid should I use?
Use the optional KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid (103 lp/in 8:1).
Carestream Health has not tested other grids.
If you use another grid, make sure that you evaluate the best conditions for image
quality.
You can order extra Front Panels for mounting standard long-length grids.
What kind of collimation is best?
Use vertical collimation for long-length imaging exams. The image stitching algorithm uses the
non-image area at the sides of the phosphor screen to correctly align the image information.
For best results, collimate approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) inside the image target on the Front
Panel or Grid.
How many cassettes will I need?
Use the minimum number of cassettes required to capture the desired image. Large unexposed
areas can degrade image quality.
What kind of filtration is required?
Use an intensity profile compensation filter (wedge filter) to pre-attenuate images.

367
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Entering Data for an LLI Exam


1. Enter Patient data into the CR System the same way you would for a standard study.
2. If the Procedure Mapping option is enabled, enter the procedure codes for the long-length
image on the Patient Input Screen.
3. Scan a CR long-length cassette bar code, always starting with 9105 for Long-length Vertical
Cassettes and 9112 for Portable Cassettes.
4. Enter the number of long-length imaging cassettes used for the exposure.
Make sure you select cassettes that have consecutive numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. The
software will not let you select cassettes that would leave a gap in the combined image,
such as 1 and 3 or 1 and 4.
5. Enter the exam data
6. Select Save Changes.
To change the number of cassettes selected:
You cannot change this selection, however you can select Delete View and start again.
If you are processing a Long-Length Portable Cassette, a dialog box appears with the message:
Choose a patient position for this long-length exam, Erect or Supine.
How many icons should I see?
Five image icons always appear for each long-length Vertical Cassette exposure, regardless of
the number of cassettes used. The composite image is represented by the fifth image
placeholder for the Vertical Cassette.
Three image icons always appear for each Portable long-length exposure. In this example,
three icons represent images 1, 2, and the stitched image. The composite image is represented
as the third image placeholder for the Portable Cassette.
The number of the cassettes used in the exposure series appears on the composite image.

See also:
Performing a Long-Length Exam
Optimizing a Long-Length Exam
Determining the SID
LLI Techniques

368
Long-Length Imaging

Determining the SID


The Source to Image Distance (SID) for the Portable Long-length Cassette is determined
automatically when you select the Position field on the Patient Input Screen (Supine or Erect).
You can override this setting for the View as desired from the More Image Data button on the
Patient Input Screen.
To enter the correct SID:
Vertical Cassette HolderEnter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/- 1 cm.
Portable Cassette and GridEnter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in. ) +/- 1 cm.
The SID is one of the measurements used for pixel size calculations. If the calculated pixel size
is not the actual pixel size, angular measurements made from the image display may not be
accurate.
It is imperative that measured SID is within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the system.

See also:
Long-Length Imaging Configuration

369
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

LLI Techniques
The software looks for sharp edges in each of the sub-images to combine when applying the
stitching algorithm. Therefore, if you collimate closely when performing a long-length exam, your
results will improve.

See also:
Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images
CR Long-Length Grid Ratio

370
Long-Length Imaging

Scanning Long-Length Images (LLI) on the Capture Link


System
CR Systems and DR Systems behave differently when processing LLI on the Capture Link
System. See the DR Capture Link Online Help for more information about working with DR LLI.
You can scan multiple CR Cassettes on multiple systems to reduce scanning time, and process
the individual cassettes by stitching them together automatically. This workflow reduces the time
to stitch the Long-Length image for review and delivery.
Make sure that the Key Operator enables the Capture Link System option at the CR Systems.
1. Scan the cassette bar-codes.
2. Perform the exam.
3. Scan the cassettes on one or more machines in the Capture Link System.
When the last image is acquired, stitching occurs at the machine where the first long-length
cassette in the study was scanned. The image is stitched as soon as the last image is scanned,
and is available for review at any Console or ROP on the Capture Link System.
How long does it take to create a stitched image with Capture Link?
Stitching starts as soon as the last cassette is scanned. For best workflow, scan all cassettes in
parallel on various machines.

See also:
Introducing the Capture Link System

371
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Assigning and Unassigning Long-Length Images (LLI)


The process for assigning and unassigning long-length images is slightly different than the
process we use for general radiography images. Follow the procedure carefully.
Never delete the composite view icon or composite image while the sub-images are attached to
the composite's patient record. Doing so will delete all of the images for that LLI exam.
Unassigning Long-Length Images
1. Select one of the sub-images.
2. Select the Unassign Image button at the bottom of the screen.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining sub-images until all of the sub-images are unassigned.
4. Delete the composite image when all of the sub-images have been unassigned.
Assigning Long-Length Images
1. Locate the correct patient record for the LLI exam and assign it an appropriate View icon.
2. Enter the cassette ID of one of the unassigned LLI sub-images into the Cassette ID field. The
cassette ID can be found in the image's information bar in Image Review.
The 5th position in the cassette ID corresponds to the cassette's position in the LLI Study.
3. After the cassette ID has been entered, select the number of cassettes used in the LLI Study.
You do not need to enter the remaining cassette IDs.
4. Select the Unassigned Image button on the Main Menu screen to locate the unassigned LLI
sub-images.
5. Select one of the unassigned LLI sub-images.
6. Select the Assign Image button.
7. Locate the patient record.
8. Select the existing view icon that corresponds to the position of the unassigned image.
Remember that the 5th position in the cassette ID corresponds to the cassette's position in the
LLI study. The software will not let you put the unassigned image into the wrong existing LLI
view icon.
9. Repeat these steps until all of the LLI sub-images have been assigned into the correct patient
record. The composite image will automatically stitch once all of the sub-images have been
assigned.

See also:
How do I enter data for a long-length image?
How do I print long-length images?
Why are the images stitched incorrectly?
Why is the composite image distorted?
What do I do when there is no composite image?
How do I determine the SID?

372
Long-Length Imaging

KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Grid


KODAK DIRECTVIEW Long-Length Grid for Vertical Cassette Holder
KODAK DIRECTVIEW Portable Grid
Performance for LLI image quality is optimized. If you choose another grid, make sure to
evaluate the best conditions for image quality:
Grid Ratio: 8:1
103 LP
Handle the Grid with care. Dropping or bumping the Grid causes serious internal damage
that produces permanent, unacceptable imaging artifacts.
Carestream Health has not tested other grids.

373
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Long-Length Imaging

Tips for Optimizing Long-length Image Quality


There are several ways you can optimize the image quality of long-length images.
Measure Source to Image Distance (SID) accurately:
SID is one of the measurements used for pixel size calculations. If the calculated pixel size is
not the actual pixel size, angular measurements made from the image display may be
inaccurate.
Therefore, it is imperative that measured SID is within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the
system.
The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-Length Vertical Cassette Holder has a recommended
SID of 183 cm (72 in.). You can set the default SID value from 150 cm to 229 cm (60 to 90 in.),
depending on site and grid requirements. You must enter SID values in centimeters (cm).
The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Long-length Portable Cassette has a recommended SID of
150 cm (60 in.). You can set the default SID value from 101 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.),
depending on site and grid requirements. You must enter SID values in centimeters (cm).
Your staff radiographers can move the tube from the default position for an exam, but must
override the default distance and enter the measured SID when entering exam information. The
actual SID must be within +/- 1 cm of the value assigned in the system.

374
Long-Length Imaging

Composite Images

Printing Long-Length Images


The composite image is printed on a single piece of film. Use True-size printing to print the
individual images at the same size they were acquired then fasten them together if desired.
True-size printing significantly crops a composite image and is not normally used.
To use True-size imaging:
1. At the Patient Input Screen, select one of the sub-images.
2. At the Image Viewer screen, select the Crop Box Adjustment Tab.
3. Select True-size Print.
4. Select Save & Accept Image.
5. Repeat these steps for the remaining sub-images.

See also:
How do I make a True-size print?
Why are the images stitched incorrectly?
Why is the composite image distorted?
What do I do when there is no composite image?
How do I determine the SID?
How do I enter data for a long-length image?
What techniques can I use with long-length imaging?
How do I unassign and assign long-length images?

375
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Viewing Long-Length Images


There are always five image icons that appear when a long-length series is created, even if only
three or four will be used in the final image.
To view long-length images:
View each image segment acquired.
View the processed composite image, which appears in a resolution to fit the screen.
With long-length imaging enabled, you can activate QA Mode just for the composite image.
Doing so does not affect the QA Mode for standard images or long-length image segments.
There is no exposure index calculated for the composite image. To evaluate the technique, use
the exposure index for one of the image segments.

See also:
Viewing Modes

376
Long-Length Imaging

No Composite Image
If no composite image forms:
Make sure the Long-length option is enabled.
Print the individual segments True-size and tape them together.
Unassign the sub-images and reassign them to produce a composite image.

See also:
Images are Stitched Incorrectly
Distorted Composite Image
Viewing Long-Length Images

377
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Images are Stitched Incorrectly


To review images stitched in the wrong order:
The phosphor screen is in the wrong cassette.
The bar-code label on the cassette is incorrect.
Place the image plate into the correct cassette or place the correct bar-code label on the
cassette before further use.
When one or more images are missing:
There were fewer images in the long-length exposure specified than were actually used.
Unassign images and reassign or handle individually, then print.
To resolve stitching that is misaligned:
The Cassette Holder door could be ajar.
Check that door is tightly closed.
Incorrect Source to Image Distance.
Enter proper Source to Image Distance (SID).
Software problem.
Call Service.

See also:
Assigning and Unassigning LLI Images

378
Long-Length Imaging

Distorted Composite Image


The composite image can become distorted when the incorrect Source to Image Distance
(SID) is entered. Use the correct SID values;
Vertical Cassette HolderEnter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/-1 cm.
Portable Cassette and GridEnter a value from 102 cm to 183 cm (40 to 72 in.) +/-1 cm.

See also:
Images are Stitched Incorrectly
No Composite Image

379
Total Quality Tool
What Is TQT?
The DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool (TQT) is a comprehensive, quality assurance system
that evaluates various aspects of image quality on KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems and
KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes. With a few quick steps, you can verify that the system is
functioning within its normal operating specifications.
TQT is an optional feature for DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. If the TQT option is not activated,
contact Carestream Health for purchase information.
Carestream Health recommends the use of the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool as
part of a quality control program for KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems. Additional quality
control tests should be incorporated into the quality control program as required by local
regulations.
The KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool does not directly evaluate or provide a
quality control capability for the X-ray equipment used or output destination devices
(such as workstation monitors or film printers) connected with the CR System. Quality
control procedures for other components in the imaging chain must be followed at the
recommended intervals according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR System must be calibrated at the recommended intervals
according to instructions from Carestream Health, Inc. All components in the imaging
chain (such as the X-ray equipment, workstation monitors, or film printers) must be
calibrated at the recommended intervals according to the manufacturer's instructions.

381
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Performing System Tests


Cassette Test Frequency
Test all cassettes used in your system twice per year using the DIRECTVIEW CR Total Quality
Tools cassette testing feature.
System Image Quality Test Frequency
Perform CR System Image Quality Tests monthly on a dedicated cassette to assure that the
test results obtained accurately reflect the CR Systems operating condition.
If dedicated cassettes are not available, choose a cassette of each size, then verify the quality
of these cassettes using the CR Total Quality Tools cassette testing feature. Make sure to use
the same cassettes each time you test.
You can test more than once per month. However, the Test Results Graphs show a maximum
of 13 results, representing the recommended testing for one year (12 monthly and one yearly
test). If you test more frequently, the last 13 results that are displayed will represent less than
one years data.
CR System Tests That May be Performed:
Recommended Test Quality Control Test Comment
Interval
Daily Erase Cassettes-Refer For cassettes that are
to Erase Cassette used infrequently or if
information in the CR unintended X-ray
System Hardware exposure is suspected
Guide
Once per week or as CR System-
recommended by Workstation Display
manufacturer Calibration
CR System-
Printer/Film Calibration
Once per month, every CR Cassette/Screen
200 exposures, or as inventory, Inspection,
necessary and Cleaning

See also:
What is TQT?
Performing System Tests
Testing Cassettes
Appending the Session

382
Total Quality Tool

Testing Cassettes
Test all of your cassettes at least twice a year using the Total Quality Tool for General
Radiography. You can test all your cassettes at once or extend the tests over a period of time.
Tests on multiple machines can be accumulated, consolidated, and reported over an indefinite
period of time. This feature lets you perform long-term trend analysis.
Test your KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes to verify that the cassette quality is within
acceptable limits.
To begin test procedures:
1. Obtain a complete list of cassette IDs for all cassettes in your inventory.
2. Answer the following questions:
Has someone already started a cassette test?
Which cassettes have not been tested?
Should test results for the cassettes you want to test be appended to the previous session or
should you start a new session?
This information will help you decide whether a cassette needs to be tested and if your test
results should be part of the previous testing session or the start of a new session.

See also:
What is TQT?
Appending the Session

383
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Selecting a Test Phantom


Select the phantom that matches the size and type of cassette you are testing. Phantoms for
use with CR Total Quality Tool for General Radiography come with a molded plastic tray to test
the following DIRECTVIEW CR Cassettes:
35 x 43 cm
24 x 30 cm
18 x 24 cm
35 x 35 cm
15 x 30 cm
Phantom Tray

See also:
What is TQT?
Appending the Session

384
Total Quality Tool

Positioning a Test Phantom


Test phantoms must be positioned specifically for the size and type of the phantom. A guide has
been developed to position the phantoms accurately and repeatedly during testing based on the
size and type of cassette being tested.
The molded plastic phantom tray contains three overlapping recessed areas, so you can fit
different size cassettes securely in the tray before placing the Test Phantom inside the tray.
Positioning Tray and Phantoms

35 x 43 cm, 24 x 30 cm, or 18 x 24 cm cassettes fit squarely in specially designed slots and do


not require special orientation.
35 x 35 cm and 15 x 30 cm cassettes must be positioned so that the center targets on the test
phantom are exposed.
When the cassette and Test Phantom are positioned properly, the test images will be oriented
as shown:

385
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

See also:
What is TQT?
Selecting a Test Phantom

386
Total Quality Tool

Total Quality Tool

Appending the Session


When you start a new TQT testing session, all previous data becomes inaccessible. If you want
all of the cassettes in your inventory to be tested and organized under one session, check and
verify that every cassette has been tested at least once.
1. Check the cassette IDs on your inventory against the IDs displayed on the Cassette Screen
Test Results page.
The Cassette Screen Test Results page displays the date, time, cassette ID, size and type
of each cassette tested as well as individual subtest results. You can see those cassettes
that have already been tested and those that still need to be tested.
2. Look at the Total # Cassettes Tested field on the Cassette Screen Test Page 3.
This counter includes each tested cassette only once; multiple tests on a cassette are
excluded from its total. When the Total Number of Cassettes Tested equals the total
number of cassettes in your inventory, you have tested all cassettes at least once and can
end the session.
Before running a cassette test, decide whether the results should be part of a new session or
appended to the previous session. To append to a previous session, select the Append to
Previous Session check box.

387
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Exposure

Determining the Exposure


It is not necessary to determine the exposure setting each time an image test is performed, but
remember that exposure settings are only valid for the particular X-ray source for which they are
determined.
Once you have determined the exposure setting, you can use it for all Total Quality Tool image
tests on that specific unit until the X-ray equipment is serviced or recalibrated. Those settings
will no longer be valid and will have to be established again.
To determine the exposure for TQT for General Radiography:
Use this technique to expose General Radiography cassettes for TQT testing.
1. Turn on the X-ray equipment and the collimator light on the X-ray tube.
2. Attach 0.5 mm Copper and 1 mm Aluminum filtration to the bottom of the X-ray tube. Tape the
filters if necessary.
3. Two filters are provided (and can be stored) in the Test Phantoms protective case.
4. Collimate the beam so that the edges of the tray are within the beam of light, fully exposing the
dosimeter.
5. Place a lead sheet or a lead apron between the floor and the phantom tray. Place a dosimeter
calibrated for (80 kV) centered on top of the tray.
6. Use the following specifications for the initial setup of the X-ray equipment:
80 kVp
40 mAs
80 kVp (1) is mandatory. You can adjust the mAs to produce the correct exposure level.
The dosimeter should show an exposure level of 0.0 mR 0.2.
If the mR reading is lower than the specification, increase the mAs setting on the X-ray
equipment.
If the mR reading is higher than the specification, decrease the mAs setting on the X-ray
equipment.
If the dosimeter displays a reading of 10.0 mR 0.2, record the reading.
7. Expose the dosimeter three more times to verify consistency.
All three readings should be within 0.5 mR.

See also:
What Is TQT?

388
Total Quality Tool

Collimating for TQT Testing


The field of exposure must completely cover the cassette's surface area for proper collimation
for General Radiography.
Position of the dosimeter:

See also:
What Is TQT?

389
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

System Testing

Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page


When you open the Total Quality Tool (TQT) and run a test, you begin a new session.
To use the Total Quality Tool Main Page:
Select and run image tests and view test results.
Discard results of the last test performed in the current session.
Start a new session or append to the last session.
Access a summary of prior test results.
Access another page for testing individual cassettes.
Tests
Phantom Image Test Tests the image quality of the system. The calculated
exposure of appropriate Test Phantom is required. (Use a
cassette exposed with a standard dose phantom.)
Insert the cassette when prompted to Load Cassette.
Flat Field Image Test Tests Field Uniformity, Streaks, and Speed Deviation.
Once the Phantom Image Test is complete, TQT
automatically prompts you to Load Cassette for the Flat
Field Image Test. Use the same exposure settings as the
Phantom Image Test, but do not use a Test Phantom.
Erased Image Test Automatically prompts to Load Cassette for Erased Image
Test. The Erase Image test is performed using erased
cassettes only and does not require an X-ray exposure.
System Noise Test Automatically prompts to Load Cassette. System Noise tests
are performed using erased cassettes only and do not
require an X-ray exposure.
Discard Test Discards the results of the last test performed in the current
session.
Cassette Test Opens Cassette Screen Test page for Flat Field Image Test.
Window/Level Identifies artifacts in the image. TQT images can be
transferred to the CR System and viewed on the image
viewer.
Results View Results Page 1
Phantom Image Test
View Results Page 2
Flat Field Test
Erased Image Test

390
Total Quality Tool

System Noise Test


Cassette Size Lets you use the keyboard to select the size and type of the
cassette you are testing.
Main Menu Select the Main Menu button to close the Total Quality Tool,
end the current session, and return to the CR System Main
Menu.
Back Select Back to return to the previous page within the current
session.

See also:
What Is TQT?
Performing System Tests
Testing Cassettes
Selecting a Test Phantom
Positioning a Test Phantom

391
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Performing Phantom Tests for General Radiography


To create a Phantom Image Test:
1. Erase all cassettes to be tested.
2. Turn on the X-ray equipment and the collimator light on the X-ray tube.
3. Place the cassette tube-side-up in the phantom tray on the floor.
4. Make sure that the cassette labels are positioned exactly as shown in How to Orient a Test
Phantom (for TQT for General Radiography).
5. Move the X-ray tube to 180 cm (72.0 in.) above a clear area of the floor.
6. Center the tray edges within the collimator light.
7. Attach 0.5 mm Copper and 1 mm Aluminum filtration (supplied) to the bottom of the X-ray tube.
Use tape to secure the filters, if necessary.

8. Position the copper filter next to the tube.


Use the exposure information as prepared in Determining the Exposure.
9. Position the test phantom on the tray. See Positioning a Test Phantom.
10. Expose the cassette. See Determining the Exposure.
11. Wait 5 minutes before scanning the cassette to ensure a constant Exposure Index.
12. Start the Total Quality Tool. See Using the Total Quality Tool Main Page.
13. Select the Phantom Image Test button.
14. When you see the Load cassette message, load the cassette you exposed for the selected
test.
All cassettes to be tested must be erased first.
Do not use a Bucky or grid during this procedure.

See also:
Determining the Exposure
Positioning a Test Phantom

392
Total Quality Tool

Performing the Erased Image Test


Correct operation of the CR system requires that the stimulated light signal be proportional to
the X-ray exposure. Light measured from an exposed CR cassette must not be influenced by
previous exposures or by extraneous light sources in the CR System.
Stray light can result from inadequate filtration of the laser light or from light leaks in the CR
system cabinet. This test should be done with the highest level of ambient lighting that will be
used in normal operation of the CR system. In this test, the signal from a fully erased CR
cassette is used to verify adequate erasure and the absence of stray light sources.
For this test, the same cassette that was used for the uniformity test is re-scanned. Because
exposure level dependent erasure is the final step of the reading process, the cassette should
be fully erased when reading is completed. Code values read from the cassette are spatially
filtered to eliminate outliers due to small dust particles. The maximum code value in the resulting
data is found.
To perform the Erased Image Test:
Rescan the cassette from the Flat Field Test.
The Erased Residual results are reported in the Total Quality Tool as the average code
value for the erased cassette.
Corrective Action
Verify that the screen was erased.
Verify that there are no bright light sources near the CR System.
Repeat the test.
If failure condition persists, call Service.

See also:
Flat-Field Image Tests
What Is TQT?

393
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Understanding the System Noise Test


System Noise is measured only with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool because the
CR System operates in a special hardware mode in which the signal associated with system
electronic noise is amplified and measured. The erased cassette is scanned a second time with
the CR System in this hardware configuration.
The full 2-D noise power spectrum is computed for the resulting image and the 1-D spectra
parallel to the fast- and slow-scan directions are estimated. Median methods are used to
estimate the average of each of the 1-D noise power spectrum over spatial frequency. This
technique is insensitive to noise spikes. The global maximum of the full 2-D noise power
spectrum is then estimated.
To perform the System Noise Test:
Rescan the cassette from the Erased Image Test.
The System Noise Test Results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.
o Fast-Scan System Noise
o Slow-Scan System Noise
o Overall System Noise

See also:
Performing the Erased Image Test
What Is TQT?

394
Total Quality Tool

Cassette Testing

Cassette Testing Menu


Testing Cassettes with TQT
Flat-Field Image Tests
Performing a Flat-Field Image Test
Best Results from Cassette Testing
Viewing Test Result Indicators
Reported Cassette Test Results
How to Export Data

395
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Testing Cassettes with TQT


1. At the Key Operator Functions menu, select Total Quality Tool.
2. Select Cassette Test to open the Cassette Screen Test page.
3. Make sure each cassette has a Flat-field image.
4. Test one size and type of cassette at a time.
The results will be grouped according to cassette size and type, making it easier to view and
find results for a particular cassette.
5. If the cassette test fails, set the cassette aside and retest it after you have tested the remaining
cassettes in a session.
Retesting all failed cassettes at once isolates duplicate tests at the end of your session
results, rather than having them dispersed throughout your session.

See also:
Performing a Flat-Field Test

396
Total Quality Tool

Flat-Field Image Test


Computed Radiography requires that the code value at each pixel accurately reflects the X-ray
exposure at each location. Flat-field exposures should result in a uniform response from the CR
System, and they provide the most stringent test for many common image artifacts that can
occur in CR Systems.
Flat-field exposures are used for the following tests of uniformity and artifacts:
Field Uniformity Maximum code value difference between sub-images.
Corrective Action: Verify that the cassette is properly exposed
and not under-collimated. If heel effect is satisfactory and a FAIL
condition persists, call Service.
Line Position A code value representing the RMS pixel variations associated
Noise with wobble in the galvonometer mirror.
Corrective Action:
Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-
collimated.
Verify that the exposure conditions are correct.
Repeat the test.
Record values.
Call Service.
Exposure Conditions:
0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration
80 kVp
10 mR +/- 0.2
Banding Caused by periodic fluctuations in the slow scan direction.
Reported as the code value representing the magnitude of pixel
variations with reference to slow scan velocity.
Corrective Action: Call Service.
Chatter May result from inadequate lubrication of the lead screw. This
results in fluctuations in the slow-scan direction that are not
related to the pitch of the slow scan. Reported as a code value
representing pixel variations associated with chatter in the slow
scan assembly.
Corrective Action: Call Service.
Streaks Both the location (pixel or line number) and code value are
calculated to analyze deviations from the background (slow-scan
streaks and fast-scan streaks).
Corrective Action:
Check for streaks or lines on the cassette.

397
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Clean the screen. Look for scratches.


Call Service.

398
Total Quality Tool

Performing a Flat-Field Image Test


To create a Flat-Field Test Image:
1. Make sure the cassette is erased.
2. Turn on the X-ray equipment.
3. Collimate the beam of light so that the edges of the light fall on the outer edges of the cassette.
4. Expose the cassette using the same positioning, filter, and exposure values used to create the
Phantom Test Image, but do not use the test phantom. See Performing a Phantom Image Test.
5. Make sure the cassette contains a Flat-field image. See Flat-Field Image Tests.
6. At the Cassette Screen Test page, select Flat-field Image Test.
7. When you see the message Load Cassette, load the cassette with the Flat-field exposure into
the CR System.
8. At the Processing Complete message, check the result for each listed subtest.
9. Repeat steps 5-8 until all cassettes are tested.

See also:
Flat Field Test Failure

399
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Best Results from Cassette Testing


To make the most of your cassette testing, follow these suggestions.
Make sure each cassette contains a flat-field image.
Test one size and type of cassette at a time. The results will be grouped according to cassette
size and type, making it easier to view and find results for a particular cassette.
Retest all failed cassettes at once to isolate duplicate tests at the end of your session.
Do not load a cassette until AFTER you have initiated the testing process by selecting Flat-Field
Image Test. Wait for the system message "Load Cassette" and then load the cassette.

See also:
Cassette Testing Menu
Testing Cassettes with TQT
Flat-Field Image Tests
Performing a Flat-Field Image Test
Viewing Test Result Indicators
Reported Cassette Test Results

400
Total Quality Tool

Viewing Test Result Indicators


Indicator Indicator Color Results Recommendations
Status
Ready Gray Normal Ready to accept
cassette.
Pass Green Normal Ready to accept
cassette.
Pass Amber Passed but See
approaching the Troubleshooting.
specification
limit

Fail Red Outside of the See


specification Troubleshooting.
limit

NA Purple Invalid result Check for proper


due to invalid orientation of
cassette, invalid Phantom.
test image, or
Check for proper
incorrect
exposure level.
exposure
Check for proper
filtration at the tube.
Check the field of
exposure.
Repeat the test.

401
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Reported Cassette Test Results


For each cassette scanned, the following results are reported:
Cassette ID Listed for each cassette measured.
Speed Deviation Reported as a code value.
Field Uniformity Error Reported as the maximum code value difference
between the sub-images.
Slow-Scan Streaks The largest amplitude streak is reported as a code
value.
Fast-Scan Streaks The largest amplitude streak is reported as a code
value.
Corrective Action Inspect the screen for damage.
If the CR System has passed all Clean the screen using the cleaning instructions
four image tests, any cassettes provided in the CR Cassette Instruction Sheet.
that fail one or more of the
Repeat the test.
cassette tests should be set
aside. If the cassette still fails, it should be removed from
use.

See also:
Testing Cassettes with TQT
Best Results from Cassette Testing
Viewing Test Result Indicators

402
Total Quality Tool

Results

Using Results (Page 1)


Troubleshooting TQT Test Results
Phantom Image Test Failure

403
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using Results (Page 2)


Flat Field Test Failure
Performing the Erased Image Test
System Noise Test Failure

See also:
Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography

404
Total Quality Tool

How to Export Data


Cassette test results are organized into sessions so that data can be easily maintained, viewed,
and exported. You can save test results in one session by appending test results until all your
cassettes have been tested, or you can test your cassette inventory over multiple sessions.
When a session is complete, you can export the results and then start a new session.
1. Select the Export button in the bottom left corner of the screen.
2. Select the destination drive to save your data.
3. Select OK.

See also:
Exporting Data Using Administrative Analysis and Reporting Software

405
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Additional Tests

Cassette Inventory and Inspection


Cassette inventory and inspection should be the first task on your list when performing a series
of Total Quality Tool tests.
Do the following:
Inventory and inspect the equipment you are going to test.
Make sure that the inventory includes everything on the itemized list of components,
accessories, options and user manuals purchased.
Check that the CR System and accessories are properly installed. Make sure that you have the
correct number of cassettes of each type and size.
Inventory and inspect all cassettes and screens.
Examine each cassette visually for external defects.
For screens, see the instruction sheet that comes with the KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Cassette
for instructions on inspecting, handling, and cleaning phosphor screens.
During acceptance testing, select several cassettes and set aside for subsequent quality control
testing.

406
Total Quality Tool

Cleaning Cassettes
Storage phosphor screens are not subject to physical contact in normal use and consequently
do not require a routine procedure surface cleaning.
Clean storage phosphor screens when you have identified a specific artifact associated with
screen surface contamination (such as persistent dust or fingerprint artifacts).
Clean storage phosphor screens according to the manufacturer's instructions (available
separately).
Open each cassette and extract the screen to inspect for dust or scratches.
Record all the cassette numbers, the corresponding phosphor screen identification numbers,
and any notes on their condition. Note surface defects and scratches on the cassette inventory
record.
Carefully close and latch each cassette.

407
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Film-Printer Calibration Test


1. Verify the printer and CR System combination.
2. Calibrate each printer using the procedures provided by the manufacturer.
Optical density measurements require a calibrated densitometer.
3. Perform printer calibration/CR System verification:
Periodically per the printer manufacturers recommendations as part of a quality control
program.
Whenever CR System components or printer are serviced or replaced, including software
upgrades.
Whenever you observe an unexpected change in image quality.
To verify the CR System and Printer Calibration:
1. See Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration for a sample of the SMPTE pattern.
2. Acquire and label the printed film.
3. Measure and record the optical density for each test patch.
Two patches are labeled 50%.
Results
Make sure that the plot of density versus percentage is linear and the range of density (the
maximum density minus the minimum) is between 2.5 and 3.1.
Compute the least-squares fit of density with respect to the fractional of full response shown on
the SMPTE pattern (i.e., treat the 10% patch as 0.10).
Make the slope of this line between 2.5 and 3.1 with no point deviating by more than 0.3 log
density from the line.
Examine the image of the entire SMPTE pattern for printer artifacts, such as lines, banding or
density non-uniformities.

408
Total Quality Tool

Workstation Display Calibration Test


1. Verify the display calibration and combination CR SystemWorkstation Display Calibration for
all workstations that you use.
2. Calibrate the workstations by following the recommendations provided by the manufacturer.
Verify the gray scale calibration of the CR Systemworkstation display combination.
Use a Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) pattern RP-133 as
seen in Key Operator Functions > Monitor Calibration.
Display luminance measurements require a calibrated photometer.
3. Perform the Display CalibrationCR System Verification:
Periodically per the display device manufacturers recommendations as part of a quality
control program.
Whenever components of the CR System or workstations are serviced or replaced,
including software upgrades.
Whenever you observe an unexpected change in image quality.
To verify grayscale calibration:
1. See the CR System Online Help for information on generating and sending the SMPTE pattern
to the workstation.
2. Display, magnify, and position the SMPTE patterns image to fill the center of the image display
area with each of the 14 SMPTE test patches labeled with a percentage value (0%, 10%, etc.).
3. Measure and record the luminance for each test patch.
Two patches are labeled 50%, although only one is used.
Results
Make sure that the plot of logarithm (base 10) of the luminance versus percentage is linear and
the range of log luminance (the maximum log luminance minus the minimum) is between 2.5
and 3.1.
Compute the least-squares fit of log luminance with respect to the fractional of full response
shown on the SMPTE pattern (i.e., treat the 10% patch as 0.10).
Make the slope of this line between 2.5 and 3.1 with no point deviating by more than 0.3 log
luminance from the line.
Examine the image of the entire SMPTE pattern for monitor artifacts, such as lines, banding, or
density non-uniformities.

409
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Troubleshooting

Phantom Image Test Failure


Select the test name from the list below to view a description of the problem and suggested
corrective action.
Pixel Size Test
Pixel Size is the average center-to-center distance between pixels.
Image segmentation methods are used to automatically detect the location of the edges of the
apertures along the top, bottom, right, and left of the phantom test image.
For each side of the image, a linear "least-squares" fit of the detected locations is made to the
known relative locations of the edges. The average slope that you calculated for the top and
bottom rows of apertures measures the average fast-scan pixel size, and the average slope
calculated for the left and right columns of apertures measures the average slow-scan pixel
spacing.
Pixel Size is reported as a percentage deviation in Pixel Size Error Fast and Pixel Size Error
Slow.
Corrective Action
Note whether Pixel Size Error is Fast or Slow.
Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Repeat the test and record any failed values.

Aspect Ratio Test


The pixel Aspect Ratio is calculated for the left side, the middle, and the right side of scan lines
in the fast-scan direction.
The local fast-scan pixel size is measured by the center-to-center distances between apertures
in the Test Phantom.
Left Side Use the first and third apertures.
Center Use apertures on either side of the center.
Right Side Use first and third apertures from the end of the scan line.

The Aspect Ratio is then computed as the ratio of the average slow-scan pixel size to the local
fast-scan pixel size.
The Aspect Ratio Error is the percentage deviation from the designed aspect ratio (unity) for
the left, middle and right sides of the image.
The Average Aspect Ratio Error is computed as the ratio of the Average Slow-Scan Pixel
Size to the Average Fast-Scan Pixel Size.
Aspect Ratio is reported as the Aspect Ratio Error Left, Aspect Ratio Error Middle, Aspect
Ratio Error Right, and Aspect Ratio Error Average each expressed as a percentage of the
designed aspect ratio.

410
Total Quality Tool

Corrective Action
Note if the Aspect Ratio Error is Left, Middle, Right, or Average.
Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Repeat the test and record any failed values.

Scan Linearity
Scan Linearity is the measurement of the deviation of the aperture locations from their
expected locations, based on the linear least-squares fit of the measured locations used to
compute the Pixel Size. From these measurements, the variation in scan speed with position is
calculated for each direction.
The deviation from Scan Linearity is calculated as the maximum deviation of scan speed from
the average speed. The Fast-scan Speed Error and the Slow-scan Speed Error are
expressed as a percentage of the average speed.
This measure of Scan Linearity represents the maximum possible percentage error in length
measurements that could be made by using mean pixel spacing values.
Scan Linearity is reported as the peak-to-peak Fast-Scan Speed Error and Slow-Scan
Speed Error expressed as a percentage of the average scan speed in the respective direction.
Corrective Action
Note if the Scan Linearity is Fast Scan or Slow Scan.
Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Repeat the test and record any failed values.

Exposure Response
Computed Radiography requires that the code value at each pixel accurately reflects the X-ray
exposure at that location. KODAK DIRECTVIEW CR Systems produce raw code values that are
linearly related to the logarithm of X-ray exposure. One of the most important steps in quality
control testing is to verify the large-area exposure response linearity, since all other tests will
be done in terms of these code values.
The average response of three uniform areas of the phantom test image is computed. Image
segmentation methods are used to identify three areas of the image. The large square area in
the center of the phantom test plate has minimal attenuation. The smaller square area directly
below the central square has uniformly high attenuation. Areas to the left and right of the central
square have a middle value of attenuation. In each of these areas, the average of the code
values in a square 2.0 x 2.0 cm is computed. The expected attenuation of the phantom test
plate is used to predict the exposure response for these three levels of attenuation under the
specified X-ray beam conditions.
The Exposure Response Test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.
The error in the average code value (CV) for each of the three levels of attenuation is reported
in the Total Quality Tool as: Low-Exposure Response Error (CV), Mid-Exposure Response Error
(CV), and High-Exposure Response Error (CV). These are compared with the expected code
values based on the predicted attenuation of the test phantom.

411
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Corrective Action
Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Verify that the exposure conditions are correct:
o 0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration
o 80 kVp
o 10 mR 0.2 (0.0876 mGy 0.00175 mGy)
If high-exposure result is PASS and mid- or low-exposure results are FAIL, check kVp.
If high-, mid- and/or low-exposure results are FAIL, check mR (mGy).
Inspect the screen. If the screen has discolored, repeat the test with a second cassette.
Verify that the phantom is oriented properly on the cassette.
Repeat the test and record failed values.
Call Service.

Noise
Image Noise depends on factors such as:
Exposure Technique
Performance of the CR System
Image Processing
Display
Evaluate noise under well-defined exposure conditions and in a way that is independent of
arbitrary image processing and display choices. Because noise measurements are very
sensitive to image artifacts, they normally require specially prepared materials and laboratory
conditions. The Total Quality Tool uses algorithms that distinguish between artifacts and the
underlying noise.
The Noise test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.
The noise results are reported as the estimated mean pixel deviation for each of the three
exposure levels used for the Exposure Response test.
Corrective Action
Verify that the phantom is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Verify that the exposure conditions are correct:
o 0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration
o 80 kVp
o 10 mR 0.2 (0.0876 mGy 0.00175 mGy)
If high-exposure result is PASS and mid- or low-exposure results are FAIL, check kVp.
If high-, mid- and/or low-exposure results are FAIL, check mR (mGy).
Inspect the screen. If the screen has discolored, repeat the test with a second cassette.

412
Total Quality Tool

Verify that the phantom is oriented properly on the cassette.


Repeat the test and record failed values.
Call Service.

MTF
The best predictor of CR system sharpness is obtained from measurements of spatial frequency
response. This measurement is also called the Modulation Transfer Function or MTF. Total
Quality Tool measures MTF automatically. To be a useful measure of the CR system, it is
important to minimize the influences of other components of the image chain, such as the
exposing equipment and the display devices.
Pre-sampling MTF measurements are obtained from the edges of the slightly slanted square in
the middle of the Test Phantom image.
Image segmentation methods are used to automatically determine the edge locations. The
centers of the transition for a series of adjacent lines are estimated and fit to a straight line. The
pixels on each line are then displaced accordingly, and a sub-pixel representation of the Line
Spread Function (LSF) is obtained. The pre-sampled MTF is computed from the fourier
transform of the sub-pixel LSF.
The MTF test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.
MTF is reported at two frequencies for each of the two scan directions. These frequencies
depend on pixel size. The results reported by the Total Quality Tool include:
the Fast-scan MTF @ 95% of Nyquist
the Fast-scan MTF @ 50% of Nyquist
the Slow-scan MTF @ 95% of Nyquist
the Slow-scan MTF @ 50% of Nyquist
Corrective Action
Verify that the phantom is oriented properly on the cassette.
Inspect the phantom for damage such as kinks or creases.
Repeat the test and record failed values.
Call Service.

Pixel Position
Flat-Field (Uniform) exposures provide the most stringent subjective test for many common
image artifacts that occasionally occur in CR Systems. However, there are some artifacts that
cannot be detected with flat-field exposures.
Because CR images are read with a scanning laser beam, the relative timing of data acquisition
for each line of data is critical if the pixels are to be aligned in adjacent lines. Normally this
alignment is maintained to a very small fraction of a pixel. You can detect sub-pixel shifts in
pixel position between adjacent lines before these effects become large enough to affect image
quality in clinical images.

413
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

The linear features that are used for MTF measurements are also used to assess the line-to-line
fluctuation in pixel placement. Image segmentation methods are used to determine locations of
the edges of the central square in the test phantom image. The centers of the transition for a
series of adjacent lines are then estimated from the code values along each line. These
locations are fit to a straight line and the deviations from linearity are computed. The RMS error
of the transition centers from the fitted line is used as a measure of the line-to-line pixel
placement error.
The Pixel Position RMS test results are reported in the Total Quality Tool.
Pixel Position RMS is reported as the RMS error in the line-to-line pixel placement as a fraction
of the Pixel Size.
Corrective Action
Record results.
Call Service.

414
Total Quality Tool

Flat-field Test Failure


Select the name of the test from the list below to view a description of the problem and
suggested corrective action.
Field Uniformity
Field Uniformity is computed by partitioning the image into an array of 5 x 5 sub-images. The
mean code value of each sub-image is computed.
The Field Uniformity Error is reported as the maximum code value difference between the
sub-images. Pass-fail criteria is based on mean code value deviation of the sub images for the
appropriate cassette size.
Corrective Action
X-ray heel effect can affect the test results. Verify that the X-ray heel effect is not significant.
Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
If heel effect is satisfactory and a FAIL condition persists, call Service.

Line Position Noise


During the CR reading process, randomly distributed variations from line to line occur in the
image. This artifact is most easily observed at the beginning of fast scan lines. It is measured in
terms of uncorrelated variations in the average code values at the beginning of each line.
Line Position Noise is reported as a code value representing the RMS pixel variations
associated with wobble in the galvonometer mirror.
Corrective Action
Verify that the cassette is properly exposed and not under-collimated.
Verify that the exposure conditions are correct:
o 0.5 mm Cu + 1 mm Al filtration
o 80 kVp
o 10 mR 0.2 (0.0876 mGy 0.00175 mGy)
Repeat the test.
Record values.
Call Service.

Banding
Banding is caused by periodic fluctuations in the slow-scan direction.
Slow-Scan Banding is reported as a code value representing the magnitude of pixel variations
with reference to slow-scan velocity.
Corrective Action
Call Service.

415
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Chatter
Chatter may result from inadequate lubrication of the lead screw. This results in quasi-periodic
fluctuations in the slow-scan direction that are not correlated with the pitch of the slow-scan.
Slow-Scan Chatter is reported as a code value representing the magnitude of pixel variations
associated with chatter in the motion of the slow-scan assembly.
Corrective Action
Call Service.

Streaks
Streaks may result from a number of possible causes. Isolated deviations from the background
are analyzed for correlations in the slow-scan and fast-scan directions. Both the location (pixel
or line number) and amplitude (code value) of these are calculated.
The largest magnitude Slow-Scan Streaks and Fast-Scan Streaks are reported as code
values.
Corrective Action
Check for streaks or lines on the cassette.
Clean the screen and look for scratches.
Call Service.

416
Total Quality Tool

System Noise Test Failure


To correct a System Noise Test Failure:
1. Verify that the screen was erased.
2. Verify that there are no bright light sources near the CR System.
3. Repeat the test.
4. If a failure condition persists, call Service.

417
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Total Quality Tool

Troubleshooting TQT for General Radiography


To resolve a condition that results in a Warning or a Failure:
Study the graphs.
The graphs provided for each subtest make it easy to see if the results are a gradual trend
or a sudden shift in performance.
Repeat the tests.
Warnings and Failures could be the result of procedural errors, and should be verified by
repeating the tests.
Determine the general cause.
Determine whether the Warning or Failure is caused by the CR System or the cassette.
Take corrective action as appropriate.
Keep running, based on independent evaluation of image quality.

418
Utilities
Utilities
Utilities Menu
The Utilities Menu is accessed from the Main Menu. On this Help Screen, select the blue link
in the table below to access the information for the desired topic.
Quick Reference
Change Password How to Change Your Password
System Status How to View the Status of System Communications
Software Updates How to Install Software Updates
Image Recovery How to Recover Images
Capture Link Status How to Check the Capture Link Server Status

419
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Changing Your Password


You can change your password at any time. Remember to create a password that conforms to
the number and type of characters set for passwords in your facility by your Security
Administrator.
To change your password:
1. At the Main Menu, select Utilities.
2. Select Change Password.
3. Enter your old Password.
4. Enter your new Password.
5. Confirm your new Password by entering it again (exactly the same way).
6. Select the Change Password button.
What if I have forgotten my password?
Contact the Security Administrator. Your Security Administrator can reset your password so that
you can change it if needed.

420
Utilities

Installing Software Updates


Software updates are sent to the Modality from a remote location by your Service
Representative. You will know when updates are available and have been sent for installation
when an Updates Available button appears on the Main Menu. In addition, archived software
updates are kept stored on the Archived Tab.
To install software updates:
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities.
2. Select Software Updates.
3. At the NEW Software Updates Screen, check the red or green color bars at the top of the
screen.
4. When the Ready to Install light turns green, select Install Update.
To understand the light code:
Ready to Install, green lightThe prerequisites have been met for this update.
Prerequisites Not Met, red light Further action required before this installation can begin.
To install software updates from a CD or USB drive:
If the updates are delivered on a CD or a removable USB drive, insert into the appropriate drive,
select Find on Removable Media, and then select Install Update.
To meet software installation prerequisites:
1. View the Prerequisites on the lower half of the screen.
2. See which updates were installed.
3. Call Service.
To delete a software update:
Select the update file name and select the Delete Update button.
To uninstall a software update:
Select the update file name and select the Uninstall Update button.
You must be logged in as a Key Operator to install software updates.

421
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Image Recovery on the Capture Link System


When the Modality is configured for the Capture Link System but is not yet joined, it is in
Standalone mode. A console is fully functional in Standalone mode. You can operate a
Modality in Standalone mode if the Capture Link Server becomes unavailable and the
individual Modality remains joined.
If the Modality is no longer joined to the Capture Link Server, you do not lose access to the
images that are located on the hard drive of each Console. However, the link between the
image and its patient/exam data is broken, and must be restored before the image can be
reviewed or delivered.
To restore the link between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine has
switched to Standalone mode:
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities and Image Recovery.
The following data appears in a row for each image:
Accession Number
Patient ID
Acquisition Date and Time
View Name
2. Select the row(s) that represent the images you are looking for.
3. Select Recover Checked Images.
The Modality attempts to associate the image to a patient/exam.
If the Modality cannot automatically associate the image to a patient/exam, the image will be
unassigned.
See Assigning an Image
For unassigned images,
1. Re-create the patient/exam image record (Query the local or remote Work List or enter data
manually at the Patient Input Screen).
2. Assign the image to the patient and exam.
3. The data listed above appears in a row for each image.
To restore the association between an image and its patient/exam data when the machine
has returned to Capture Link Mode select Main Menu > Utilities:
See:Image Recovery to Capture Link
1. Use the filters to select the images in the system: All Studies, Need Approval, Unassigned
Images, Failed Delivery, Pending Delivery, Need Destination, or Delivered Images.
You can sort by Patient Last Name, Patient ID, Accession Number, Tech ID, or Acquisition
Date.
If you are in a Standalone mode and then join the Capture Link System, an image on your
system will not be visible or accessible unless you use the Image Recovery to Capture Link
utility.

422
Utilities

The recovered image is retrieved but unassigned to a patient/exam record if there is no


match of the Accession Number and Patient ID.
2. Select the image.
3. Selecta patient record from the RIS or create one manually.
4. Assign the image.

See also:
Rejoining the Capture Link System
Re-delivering an Image
Using Image Recovery to Capture Link List

423
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Using the Capture Link Server Status Screen


The Capture Link Server Status Screen quickly lists what machines are connected to the
Capture Link System, or what the network communication statuses of those systems are. To
access it, from the Main Menu, select Utilities.
To determine which devices are in the Capture Link System:
View the Capture Link Server Status Screen list of the names and IP address of each
machine Console and server configured for the Capture Link System. Remote Operations
Panels and other external devices are not listed.
To determine whether there is a Capture Link connectivity problem:
Select Ping Devices.
o If there is a good connection, the light appears green.
o If there is a problem with the connection, the light appears red.
To determine which types of connections you can check:
Network
Application
Database

424
Utilities

Viewing the Status of System Communications


Use this screen any time your Service Representative requests a report. Status of System
Communications provides easy access to logs about the Modality.
To access the logs:
1. Select the tab that Service requests:
Summary
.NET CLR
Hot Fixes
Assemblies
MIM Core
2. Select Snapshot Log Files. This button captures the current logs and dates them so that when
they are retrieved later, they will identify the status of the system at that time.
To tell if communication to the HIS/RIS is open:
Go to the Summary Tab and check the lights on the Device Column. If the light is green under
HIS/RIS, the Modality is communicating with the HIS/RIS.
To select the Log Files Snapshot button:
Select this button any time there are issues with the Modality performance, and every time you
need to call Service.

425
Glossary

1
1 cm scale: When selected, a one centimeter (cm) scale is applied along a horizontal and vertical edge of an image.

A
AC: Applications Consultant
Accession Number: A DICOM term; it is a number assigned to an exam and linked to the site's billing system.
Activate option: Install a floppy diskette, CD, or USB drive that contains codes that make the selected option immediately
available in the system.
Assign image: Connect an image to patient information. Only Unassigned Images can be Assigned.
auto associate: The automatic connection of a scanned image to the Patient Name and View currently active on the console.

B
Back button: Returns you to the previous screen or function. If you have made changes, the Back button toggles to Cancel.
Backup and Restore: Lets you save configurations to a removable device, and restore selected configurations into other
machines.
Bar-Code: A series of black and white lines that represent data that can be scanned and digitized.
Bar-Code Configuration: Change the way the bar code scanner reads the Accession Number, Tech ID, and Patient ID, and
Procedure Code.
Begin Study button: Sends a message to the HIS/RIS that the study is started. Appears on the Patient Input Screen when
New Patient is selected.
Body part: The area of the body that is imaged.
Brightness: Makes an image lighter or darker.

C
Calibrate: To configure a monitor or touch screen to a standard, repeatable response.
Cancel button: Returns you to the previous function without automatically saving changes; toggles to the Back Button after
you have selected Save Changes. The Cancel button displays the Confirm changes confirmation dialog.
Capture Link System: In a Capture Link System, all patient records and all patient images from any device joined to the
Capture Link System are available for review and use on any device joined to the Capture Link System
Cassette: The outer casing that contains the storage phosphor screen. The cassette is inserted into the CR System.
Cassette ID: The number that identifies the cassette holding the storage phosphor screen on which the patient was exposed.
Cassette Testing: TQT, requires a flat-field image.
Change Destination Profile: Changes the automated process of selecting destinations for an image based upon user-
specified criteria.
Change Profile: Changes the selected destinations for an image or study.
Clear all Fields button: Removes all the information entered in the search criteria fields.
Clipped Anatomy: Default reason for rejecting an image. Anatomy that was not captured because the cassette was mis-
aligned at exposure. Image data is physically missing from the image.
Collimation: To restrict the size of the X-ray beam by reducing it, usually with lead shutters, to accurately localize the area of
interest on the patient and reduce the patient's overall exposure to radiation.
Console: A Modality that is included in a Capture Link System
CR System: Computed Radiography System, used to create digital radiographic images.

427
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

D
Default: Predefined information that is automatically applied, but which can be replaced with a specific selection.
Delete All Patients button: A Key Operator function to delete all patient information on the system. There is no recovery from
this command. It deletes even protected records.
Delivered: An image that has been accepted and sent to destinations such as a workstation or a printer is called a delivered
image. A delivered image cannot be modified unless it is copied, and then you can modify the copy.
Destination: A location where an image is sent. Destinations include laser printers and clinical and diagnostic workstations.
DICOM: Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine.
Disk Manager: The automated function that controls storage space for images on the hard drive. Disk Manager deletes the
oldest images when the amount of free space reaches a Key Operator specified level.
Dose Measurements: The measure of the amount of energy (using a dosimeter) deposited in tissue due to X-ray exposure.
DR: Digital Radiography; the use of a photo conductor-based image capture method,

E
Error Message: A message displayed in a dialog box or in the System Errors log that describes a problem that occurred
during the operation of the CR System.
EVP: Enhanced Visualization Processing: a contrast enhancement algorithm contained within the IPL.
Exam: A set of images, usually of the same body part, which are part of a procedure and have a common accession number.
A collection (set) consisting of a raw image, its versions, Exam Information, and Patient Information.
Exam Information: Data pertaining to the way an exam is performed.
Exam Type: View. body part and projection (from the Exam Information) and, optionally, position.
Export: Transfer information from the CR or DR System so that it can be analyzed and used.
Exposure Index: A numerical value computed from the average code value of those areas of the image data that are used by
the image processing algorithm to compute the optimal tonescale.
External Device: A ROP or a RPDES that is connected to a CR or DR System, or a Capture Link Server.
External Text Box: For a printed image, the area external to the image in which the user specifies information to be displayed.
When an external text box is used, the image area is reduced. Some printers may not support this feature.

F
Failed to Deliver button: Displays a list of images that have not been successfully delivered to a destination.
Find Study Locally button: Searches the modality database to locate all patient records meeting the criteria entered.
Find Study Remotely button: Searches the HIS/RIS database to locate all patient records meeting the criteria entered.
Flag: Mark an image for review by a Key Operator at a later time.
Flat-field: An X-ray exposure that is made without use of a phantom image or a clinical image.
Focus: Configurable, which field starts with the cursor.

G
Grid Detection and Suppression: The optional feature that automatically detects and suppresses grid lines from images. This
feature is configured for each view.
GUI: Graphical User Interface - the user interface observed at the Modality monitor.

H
Half-Value Layer: The thickness of a specified substance which, when introduced into the path of a given beam of radiation,
reduces the exposure rate by one-half. HVL is a measure of beam quality and usually is specified by millimeters of
aluminum for diagnostic units. The higher the HVL, the more penetrating the X-ray beam.

428
Glossary

HIS: Hospital Information System.


HIS/RIS: See HIS and RIS - this term refers to both systems at a single site but does not imply that they are linked, or even
exist on the same network.
Histogram: The histogram is a graph of the distributions of pixel values in the image. The X-axis is exposure from low to high.
The Y -axis is frequency of occurrence.

I
IHE: Integrated Healthcare Enterprise
Image: A single picture. A data structure that contains image data, patient information, and information relating to the method
of creating the image data; in a DICOM-compliant format.
Image Adjustment: The ability of the user to change the Image Processing using the following attributes: Brightness, Latitude,
Detail Contrast, Window /Level.
Image Processing Library: The IPL contains the parameters and algorithms used to process images for optimal diagnostic
use.
Image Receptor: For Computed Radiography, the image receptor is the phosphor screen. For DR, the image receptor is the
flat panel detector.
Images not assigned: On the Main Menu, this button indicates the number of Unassigned Images currently in the system.
Internal Text Box: For a printed image, the area within the image containing user-specified information about the patient and
exam. The user can specify the default and actual location and orientation of the Internal Text Box.
Inventory: Inventory includes everything on the itemized list of components, accessories, options and user manuals
purchased.
IPL: The IPL contains the parameters and algorithms used to process images for optimal diagnostic use.

K
Key Operator: The category of user authorized to administer the modality. They Key Operator may change the setup and
operation of the machine.
kV: Kilovolts (thousands of volts) - measurement unit for x-ray beam strength.
kVp: Kilovolts Peak.
kVp Accuracy and Reproducibility: Test used to ensure that the indicated peak X-ray beam energy is accurate and
reproducible so that consistent X-ray output and contrast are maintained.

L
Look: A preset appearance for an image that includes the elements of brightness, latitude, detail contrast, sharpness, and
noise reduction.
LUT: Look-Up Table. A set of values that can be mathematically applied to the digital image which alters the look of the image.
The LUT is generated by the image processing algorithms.

M
Magnification: With respect to film screen, 100% is the same size as film screen, 93% is 93% the size of a film screen.
Mandatory Destination: A classification of Destinations. Images specified for delivery to a Mandatory Destination cannot be
deleted from the modality hard drive until the Mandatory Destination has received them. They Key Operator specifies
which, if any, destinations are Mandatory
Marker: An electronic identifier added to the image that is printed and stored.
mAs: Milliamp-seconds - measurement unit for the amount of X-ray energy delivered.
Modality: The System that is in use, such as CR System or DR System.
MPPS: MPPS is an element of the optional Scheduled Workflow software feature. The Scheduled Workflow feature
communicates with the Modality Performed Procedure Step Manager every time a procedure starts, ends, or is
discontinued using the appropriate button on the Patient Input Screen.

429
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

mR: Millirads - measurement unit for X-ray exposure.


Multi-format: Placing 2, 3, or 4 images on a single print in lengthwise or crosswise format.

N
Noise: Visible, low-contrast anomaly that appears in areas of low exposure in the image.

O
On Focus Field: Refers to the data field currently selected or active.
Options: Software programs and functions that are purchased in addition to base system software. An option must be
activated after purchase.

P
Pass-through Mode: The operating mode in which the CR System accepts, processes, and routes the exam without user
intervention.
Patient Information: The demographic data pertaining to a patient.
Patient Information Bar: The box located beneath the displayed image that displays the patient information for the displayed
image.
Patient Input Screen: Used to enter patient information and set up exams for processing.
Patient Query Screen: Used to locate Work List entries or patient studies. Enter search criteria to return a filtered list that
meet the criteria.
Patient Work List Screen: The screen that lists Work List entries or patient studies. The list may be filtered using search
criteria.
Phantom: A test object that simulates the average composition of various structures within a body part.
Positioning: The art and skill the radiographer / technologist uses to adequately demonstrate the anatomy in different
projections.
Prefix: When used with the barcode reading function, it is an optional character preceding the standard content of a printed bar
code. Prefixes and Suffixes are used when necessary to differentiate bar coded data fields.
Print button: Sends an image to a selected printer. The profile set for the cassette and image typically has a printer selected.
Processed Image: An image to which the image processing algorithms have been applied.
Projection: The relative orientation of the anatomy to the X-ray beam. Examples include Lateral, Antero-posterior.
Protected records: Patient and image records that are prohibited from being removed from the computer hard drive during the
normal operation of the Disk Manager process.

Q
QA Mode: Operating mode where the user causes images to be delivered by Accepting them after reviewing them for quality.

R
Radiolographer Technologist: Trained person who performs the radiographic examination that creates the images needed
for diagnosis.
Radiopaque Marker: An identification label introduced into path of the X-ray beam that is permanently included in the image.
Often used to specify left or right laterality.
Raw Image: Unprocessed Image. An image to which the image processing algorithms have not been applied.
Redeliver image button: Select this button to deliver an image that has been delivered previously. The current destination
selection is used to redeliver an image.
Reject: If you do not want to accept an image, and cannot modify it to your satisfaction, select Reject Image. The image moves
to the Rejected Image Screen. The image cannot be delivered to a workstation or a printer.

430
Glossary

Result sort order: Specifies the sequence in which lists of information are sorted. Selections often include alphabetical or date
order sequence.
RIS: Radiology Information System.
ROP: Remote Operations Panel- an auxiliary device at which CR exams can be initiated and images can be reviewed.
Routing: The act of transferring an image from the Modality to a specified destination.

S
Scan Status Screen: The screen at which the progress of image scanning can be seen. Also includes control of Cassette
Erasing, Cassette Transport release, Erase Lamp status.
Search: To enter criteria to find a Work List or patient record. The more specific the criteria you enter, the narrower the search.
If you do not enter any criteria, a list of all records is returned.
Select Destination button: Lets you change the destinations that will receive the image.
Session: A set of tests for cassette quality. When you start a new TQT testing session, all previous data becomes inaccessible
Shutdown: The process of exiting current tasks and applications and turning off the power to the Modality. Shutdown is
located in the Quick Menu in the lower left corner of each screen.
SNOMED: (SNM3) code is a coded sequence of numbers that identifies attributes of a view. They are a standard naming and
encoding convention for identifying body part, position, and orientation in the DICOM header.
standalone mode: When a modality is configured to be in a Capture Link System but is not currently operating with the
Capture Link System.
Study: A collection of related images and data. A Study is started and ended on the Patient Input Screen. If a HIS/RIS is used,
ending a study sends a message to close the patient record.
Study Status: Current state of completion for a study.
Suffix: When used with the barcode reading function, it is an optional character following the standard content of a printed bar
code. Prefixes and Suffixes are used when necessary to differentiate bar coded data fields.
Surround Mask: Fills in the area outside of the Region of Interest with a dark background. Enhances the ability to see detail in
soft tissue or low contrast areas of the image.
System: A self-contained computed radiography machine or several machines joined together.
System Recovery: A tab located on the Scan Status Screen on CR 825/850/900/975. Selecting System Recovery allows
access to Clear Cassette Jams.

T
Technique: Imaging methods, exposure quantity and duration, positions, for performing X-ray exams. The goal is to produce
consistent, diagnostic images.
Test Result Indicators: Colors that indicate the Status of test results when testing with the DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool.
Gray =Ready; Green=Pass; Amber=Pass; Red=Fail; Purple=NA.
Text Box: The informational area that is viewed on a sheet of film. The Key Operator can configure the size and shape of the
Text Box, and the type of data that is recorded there.
Thumbnail: A small view of an acquired image. Any saved changes to an image are reflected in the thumbnail image.
Selecting a thumbnail anywhere in the system will open a full view in the Image Viewer Screen.
Tonescale: An element of image processing in which a graduated range of gray values are constructed to optimize an image
for clinical diagnosis by highlighting the body structures of interest.
Total Quality Tool: The DIRECTVIEW Total Quality Tool (TQT) is a series of tests, standards, and recommendations that
evaluate the image quality of the CR System and the quality of the cassettes used in the system.
Trauma Button: On the Patient Query screen, this optional feature permits the immediate start of an exam without having to
specify patient demographics. The characteristics of the exam are specified using the Trauma defaults
Trauma defaults: The Key Operator function to set up different Trauma exams for use with the optional Trauma feature.
True-size Print: True-size printing delivers the image to the destination at the same size as it was captured (100%, +/- 2 %).
Note: Because of the variability in scanning, printing, and displaying images, use caution when using these images for
exact measurements. For exact measurements, place a known marker at the level of the subject when making the
exposure and calculating image magnification.

431
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

U
UID: Unique identifier: a number assigned to ensure unambiguous identification of a logical object in software (usually for a set
of data).
Unassign: Disassociate an image from a patient record.
Unassigned Image: An image that has not been connected with a patient exam record. Unassigned Images can be delivered
to all destinations except those designated as Mandatory.

V
View: The description of an image its attributes. A View is specified by a body part, projection, and patient position. The Key
Operator may configure the automated processing of images individually for each View. For best results, use the View
that best matches the image being created.
View Modification: A tab in the Image Viewer that lets you invert the image, apply grid suppression to suppress grid lines, and
apply noise reduction to reduce the appearance of noise in low exposure areas.

W
Water Mark: Disk High Water Mark and Disk Low Water Mark indicate the upper and lower limits of hard drive space use
permitted on the system. When the High Water Mark is reached, the Disk Manager deletes the oldest images until the
Low Water Mark is reached.
Window/Level: The mode in which the user changes the brightness and contrast of an Unprocessed Image. This mode is
used if the automated Image Processing is not satisfactory.
Work List: The list of patient records that describes the patients to be examined during a given time interval.
Workflow: A series of tasks necessary to perform a repeatable function.

432
Index

433
A Capture Link Configuration Screen ...................................177
Capture Link icon...............................................................185
accept image................................................................. 61, 94
capture link server .............................................................215
accessing logs .................................................................. 429
EMC ..............................................................................212
add a marker ..................................................... 118, 119, 121 logon .............................................................................213
add multi-format print ........................................ 149, 156, 161 safety ............................................................................212

add view .............................................................................. 59 capture link server status screen...............................214, 428

adding capture link system............................................177, 178, 187


marker .......................................................................... 119 destination profile..........................................................192
multi-format print........................................................... 161 entering data .................................................................195
icons..............................................................................185
additional exam information .............................................. 104 image processing..........................................................190
adjusting image review.................................................................196
crop box.......................................................................... 84 long-length ............................................................198, 375
delivered image .............................................................. 63 multi-format printing ......................................................197
image quality ............................................................ 69, 76 removing a system........................................................210
surround mask...................................................... 130, 134 standalone mode ..........................................................189
system requirements.....................................................208
administrative analysis and reporting software ................. 332 troubleshooting .............................................................211
aec ........................................................................................ 6 Carestream Health, contact...................................................5
angle measurements ........................................................ 137 Cassette
appending sessions .......................................................... 391 Cleaning........................................................................411
Testing ..........................................................399, 400, 404
arrows ................................................................................. 99
cassette ID.............................................................46, 48, 106
artifacts, eliminating ...................................... 66, 68, 111, 112
Changing.......................................................................228
assign image ................................................................. 80, 81
cassette ID error ..........................................................48, 106
assigning long-length images ........................................... 376 Duplicate ID ............................................................48, 106
auto associate..................................................................... 96 cassette tests.............................................................399, 404
automatic surround mask.................................................. 133 cassettes ..........................................................................100
automatic trigger Jammed .........................................................................45
setting ........................................................................... 222 change password ......................................................423, 424
changing
B button colors .................................................................270
backup and restore ........................................................... 218 country code .................................................................229
data field size ................................................................231
bar code failure ................................................................... 50
field descriptions ...........................................................267
bar code programming................................................ 51, 235 image processing preferences......................................298
beeper mode ................................................................ 227 image retention .............................................................269
configuration ................................................................. 224 language display ...........................................................286
prefix and suffix ............................................................ 232 look ...............................................................................307
programming ................................................................ 226 prefix and suffix.............................................................232
Reread Delay................................................................ 233 screen layout.................................................................287
samples ........................ 238, 240, 242, 244, 246, 248, 249 trauma defaults .............................................................324
stripping fields............................................................... 234 view configuration details..............................................319
bar code scanner changing the view name....................................................176
automatic data entry ............................................... 49, 236
chatter................................................................................401
configuring .................................................................... 236
manual data entry........................................................... 49 Check
SMPTE..........................................................................280
beeper mode..................................................................... 227
CISCO ...............................................................................353
brightness ..................................................................... 15, 69
CISCO Security Agent.......................................................353
BSM .................................................................. 130, 132, 133
cobb angle .........................................................................137
buttons
Print ...................................................................... 147, 151 collimation..........................................................................374
Quick reference guide ...................................................... 9 collimation for LLI ..............................................................370
C colors
changing .......................................................................270
calibrating
monitor.......................................................................... 281 comment tab......................................................................116
touch screen ................................................................. 282 composite image ...............................................................381
calibration...................................................................... 6, 281 configuration
capture link........................................................................ 204 bar code ..................................................................49, 236

434
Index

capture link ................................................................... 207 entering information...........................................................103


destination profile ......................................................... 310 capture link system .......................................................195
HIS/RIS......................................................................... 263 entering patient information .................................................55
long-length.................................................................... 268
multi-format................................................................... 158 erase cassette .....................................................................40
procedure mapping....................................................... 293 erase lamp status tab ..........................................................39
reject reasons ............................................................... 295
remote devices ............................................................. 355 erase lamps
required fields ............................................................... 297 ordering...........................................................................30
scheduled workflow .................................................. 18, 19 error conditions
view .............................................................................. 312 Unable to eject the cassette.........................................45
configure text box.............................................................. 335 EVP Plus software...............................................................13
configuring data display .................................................... 273 exam....................................................................................55
configuring Patient Query ................................................. 273 entering data ...................................................................57
performing.....................................................................140
connect to capture link ...................................................... 177 registration ......................................................97, 103, 174
connecting Exporting data ...................................................................332
capture link system............................................... 177, 201 in TQT ...........................................................................409
console exposure....................................................................303, 392
connecting .................................................................... 177
Exposure Index..................................................................143
contrast ............................................................................... 15
country code F
changing ....................................................................... 229
field descriptions
CR ..................................................................................... 215 changing .......................................................................267
CR System .......................................................................... 14 flagging images ...................................................................64
create flat-field ..............................................................401, 403, 419
image copy ..................................................................... 63
folder....................................................................................17
study ............................................................................... 97
cropping images.................................................................. 86 G
CSA Log Viewer................................................................ 353 grid line pair .......................................................................377

D grid ratio.............................................................................377
grid suppression ................................................................112
data ................................................................................... 218
restore .......................................................................... 218
H
Deleting
exam information .......................................................... 101 harvesting images .............................................................276
image record................................................. 269, 328, 349 HIS/RIS..............................................................................263
multi-format................................................................... 160 capture link....................................................................194
patient information ........................................................ 101 communication..............................................................429
procedure step.............................................................. 101 configuration .................................................................263
records.......................................................................... 349 polling query..................................................................265
views............................................................................. 175
histogram.............................................................................75
destination profile...................................................... 308, 310
HR Scanning .......................................................................23
destination summary statistics .......................................... 327
detail ................................................................................... 15 I
detail contrast................................................................ 15, 69 IHE.......................................................................................17
DICOM .............................................................................. 321 image delivery modes
Pass-through mode.........................................................91
DICOM GSDF ................................................................... 302 QA mode.........................................................................92
distorted long-length image............................................... 383 image failure ..........................................................62, 73, 132
distributing images .............................................................. 95 image icons displayed .......................................................100
download statistics.................................................... 329, 332 image presentation ......................................................73, 132
duplicate cassette ID................................................... 48, 106 image processing
capture link system .......................................................190
E changing .........................................................................15
edit mask........................................................................... 130 contrast ...........................................................................79
controls .........................................................................305
Elite ..................................................................................... 26
image recovery ..........................................................203, 423
enable reduced border...................................................... 352
Image Review Screen .......................................................171
end study .......................................................................... 102

435
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

image viewer screen ................................................... 77, 176 others ............................................................................127


images .............................................................................. 215 removing .......................................................................123
time ...............................................................................129
artifacts ........................................................................... 62
distributing ................................................................ 94, 95 mask ..................................................................130, 132, 135
reviewing ........................................................................ 67 mask enlargement .............................................................317
searching ...................................................................... 162
masking .....................................................................133, 135
installing software ............................................................. 425
applying.........................................................................135
Intensity Profile Compensation Filter for LLI ..................... 370
measure
gamma ..........................................................................284
K measurement ................................................................284
key operator functions....................................................... 217 measurement tools ............................................................137
keyboard ............................................................................. 22 mini cluster ........................................................................206

L monitor
calibrating......................................................278, 280, 281
language display pod ................................................................................285
changing ....................................................................... 286
more image data........................................................104, 108
latitude .......................................................................... 15, 69
increasing ................................................................. 15, 72 more patient data.......................................................104, 109

layout of screens............................................................... 287 MPPS ..........................................................................18, 102

line measurements............................................................ 137 multi-format............................................... 197, 339, 341, 342


change multi-format configuration button......................149
lists .................................................................................... 170 text box .........................................................................344
creating on tabs ............................................................ 291
rejected image .............................................................. 328 multiple exposures
processing.....................................................................158
LLI ..................................................... 198, 268, 369, 375, 381
LLI exam ........................................................................... 370 N
LLI Image Quality.............................................................. 378 navigation buttons .................................................................9
local user interface............................................................ 365 new features ..........................................................................1
logon ................................................................................... 31 noise ..................................................................................421
logs noise suppression..............................................................111
accessing...................................................................... 429 noise test ...........................................................................401
Long Length Imaging ........................................................ 369 number of cassettes for LLI ...............................................370
long-length ........ 372, 373, 374, 376, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383
long-length grid ................................................................. 377
O
Operating the CR System....................................................14
long-length imaging........................................................... 377
look ................................................................................... 307 options
activating.......................................................................350
Adjustment Tab ............................................................ 110
image adjustments....................................................15, 68
LUI .................................................................................... 365 registering .....................................................................350
luminance
for gamma .................................................................... 284 P
pan and zoom mode..........................................................113
M
pass thru delivery mode ......................................................91
magnification..................................................................... 113
pass-thru mode......................................................88, 91, 271
magnification glass ........................................................... 113
password
main menu ............................................................................ 7 changing .......................................................................424
main page ......................................................................... 394 forgotten........................................................................424

malicious software ............................................................ 353 patient information bar.........................................................37

managing view categories ................................................ 320 patient input screen .................................... 99, 107, 108, 176
begin study button.........................................................107
manual crop ........................................................................ 86 more image data ...........................................................108
manual reboot ..................................................................... 25 more patient data button ...............................................109
manual surround mask ..................................................... 135 patient query screen ..........................................................169
markers patient work list screen ..............................................163, 170
adding................................................................... 119, 121 performing the exam..........................................................140
deleting ......................................................................... 123
favorites ........................................................................ 124 phantom.....................................................................389, 396
measures...................................................................... 125 positioning.....................................................................389

436
Index

phantom image test .......................................................... 414 high resolution.................................................................23


polling query scheduled workflow .......................................................18, 19
HIS/RIS......................................................................... 265 screen guide ........................................................................12
portable LLI SID ................................................................ 378
screen layout .....................................................................287
preference editor changes ................................................ 204 changing .......................................................................286
prefix and suffix................................................................. 232 searching for patients ........................................................164
print ........................................................................... 147, 151 searching techniques for
printing long-length images............................................... 379 images ..........................................................................164
patients .........................................................................167
procedure mapping ........................................................... 293 prior exam .....................................................................169
procedure step .................................................................. 273 work list .........................................................................170
procedure workflow............................................................. 59 security ..............................................................................353
procedures .......................................................................... 59 Select Required .................................................................297

procedures list..................................................................... 98 Select Save Changes ........................................................297

protecting records ............................................................. 349 Server ................................................................................215


sessions
Q appending .....................................................................391
QA by image ....................................................................... 90 setting the automatic trigger ..............................................222
QA Mode ............................................................................. 92 shortcut..............................................................................360
delivery preferences ..................................................... 271 creating for Remote Access..........................................360
shutdown procedure ................................................31, 32, 35
R
SID.....................................................................................378
reboot .................................................................................. 34
SID Values.........................................................................383
records
deleting ......................................................................... 349 single image external.........................................................343
protecting...................................................................... 349 skin line enlargement...........................................................77
re-deliver an image ........................................... 199, 202, 426 control ...........................................................................130
reduced border.................................................................. 352 SMPTE test target .............................................................280
region of interest ............................................................... 303 SNOMED Code .................................................................321
reject reasons ................................................................... 295 software updates .......................................................423, 425
installing ........................................................................425
reject statistics .................................................................. 332
standalone mode .............................. 177, 185, 199, 209, 426
remote access software .................................... 357, 358, 360 capture link....................................................................189
remote devices.................................................................. 358 statistics
configuration ................................................................. 355 download.......................................................................329
remote key operator.......................................................... 357 technologist...................................................................326
configuring .................................................................... 357 status
remote security administrator............................................ 357 capture link....................................................................184
configuring .................................................................... 357 stitching
reprocessing ............................................................... 74, 136 incorrect ........................................................................382
required fields streaks ...............................................................................401
configuring .................................................................... 297 study modes ........................................................................17
reread delay ...................................................................... 233 surround mask.......................................... 130, 132, 134, 135
restart .................................................................................. 34 surround mask enlargement..............................................317
restoring data .................................................................... 218 System Recovery ................................................................43
result sort order................................................................. 273 system requirements
reverse grayscale.............................................................. 115 Capture Link..................................................................208
reviewing images ........................................................ 67, 117 system response .................................................................24
ROI.................................................................................... 303 System Status ...................................................................429
ROP .................................................................................. 215
T
S Tab ....................................................................................116
creating a list.................................................................291
sample bar codes.............. 238, 240, 242, 244, 246, 248, 249 Erase Cassette ...............................................................38
scan status screen .............................................................. 40 Erase Lamp Status .........................................................39
System Recovery............................................................43
scanning............................................................ 21, 27, 28, 47

437
Software and Key Operator Online Help Topics V 5.2 1.29.09

Tabs hide a default ................................................................325


Scan Status Tab ............................................................. 42 trauma button................................................................103
View Look Adjustment .................................................. 110 trauma defaults
Technique ......................................... 396, 397, 398, 403, 404 configuring ....................................................................322
Improving...................................................................... 142 True-size printing...............................................................155
test phantom ..................................................................... 388
tutor image.........................................................................100
testing ............................................... 396, 397, 398, 403, 404
TQT ...................................... 396, 397, 398, 403, 404, 406 U
text box ............................................................. 339, 341, 342 unassign image .............................................................82, 83
configurable .................................................................. 334
updates available button....................................................425
text boxes
using the touch-screen ........................................................22
editing ........................................................................... 345
external................................................................. 154, 343 utilities menu......................................................................423
internal.................................................................. 153, 338
multi-format................................................................... 344 V
selecting ............................................................... 152, 336
VERILUM Chroma 5 Pod ..................................................285
Total Quality Tool...................................................... 385, 388
View...................... 59, 89, 173, 174, 175, 215, 306, 312, 380
touch-screen ....................................................................... 22 adding ...........................................................................174
TQT ........................................................................... 385, 422 changing .......................................................................319
additional tests...................................................... 410, 413 definition........................................................................173
cassette testing............................................. 387, 399, 410 deleting .........................................................................175
collimation..................................................................... 393 modes .................................................................88, 91, 92
determining the exposure ............................................. 392 selecting........................................................................174
exporting data............................................................... 409 set default characteristics .....................................312, 319
film-printer calibration test ............................................ 412 view configuration details ............................................59, 319
phantom image test ...................................................... 396
phantoms, selecting ..................................................... 388 view name .........................................................................176
result indicators ............................................................ 405 viewing images ..........................................................114, 115
results pages ........................................................ 407, 408 thumbnails.......................................................................89
testing frequency .................................................. 386, 387
viewing modes.........................................................88, 91, 92
TQT Sessions ................................................................... 391
virtual keyboard ...................................................................22
TQT test results
volume settings tab............................................................368
exporting....................................................................... 409
indicators ...................................................................... 405
interpreting............................................................ 407, 408
W
optimizing ..................................................................... 404 wall unit SID.......................................................................378
Tracking window and level ...........................................................65, 71
monitor.......................................................................... 283
workflow.............................................................................178
trauma ............................................................................... 297
change trauma defaults ................................................ 324 Z
configuring defaults ...................................................... 322
entering......................................................................... 103 zoom function ....................................................................113
exams ........................................................................... 103 zoom level .........................................................................113

438

You might also like